Palm Treo 755P User Manual

User Guide  
Your Palm® Treo755P Smartphone  
C O N T E N T S  
iii  
The VersaMail® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Connections with Bluetooth® devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
C O N T E N T S  
iv  
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164  
Making room on your Treosmartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224  
C O N T E N T S  
v
NOTE Phone and text messaging services  
require a service contract with your  
Welcome  
wireless service provider. Web and email  
services require a service contract and  
high-speed data service from your wireless  
service provider. Data speeds vary based  
on network availability and capacity.  
Congratulations on the purchase of your  
Palm® Treo755P smartphone! In one  
compact and indispensable device, you  
now have all of the following:  
An advanced mobile smartphone  
Whats in the box?  
Mobile email (corporate and personal)  
High-speed Internet connection and  
data transfer with 1xRTT and EVDO  
support  
You should have received all the following  
items in the Treo smartphone box:  
®
Palm OS organizer applications  
Hardware  
KEY TERM Organizer applications: The  
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Memos  
applications are collectively referred to as  
organizer or PIM (personal information  
manager) applications.  
Treo smartphone  
Rechargeable battery  
AC charger with international adapter(s)  
(if required in your region)  
USB sync cable  
Stereo headset  
Expansion capability (miniSD)  
A 1.3-megapixel digital camera  
Text messaging  
Documentation and software  
Read This First booklet  
A media player  
Quick Reference  
Productivity software  
This guide helps you set up your Treo  
smartphone and learn to use it.  
W E L C O M E  
1
                                   
Palm Software Installation CD, which  
includes the following:  
Palm® Desktop software  
The computer with which you want to  
synchronize your personal information  
The Palm Software Installation CD  
included in the box  
Links to bonus software for your  
smartphone  
User Guide (this guide)  
User Guide for the VersaMail®  
Application  
Where to learn more  
For a quick introduction  
Palm warranty  
Quick Tour: Introduces you to many of your  
smartphones features. You can open it  
Software license agreement  
any time. Press Applications  
select Quick Tour  
, and then  
.
What do I need to  
get started?  
While using your Treo smartphone  
On-device User Guide: A specially formatted  
version of this guide, available right on your  
smartphone. To open the on-device guide,  
As you work through the instructions in this  
guide, you’ll need all the items that came in  
the Treo 755P smartphone box (see Whats  
in the box?), as well as the following:  
press Applications  
, select My Treo  
, select the Support tab, and then select  
User Guide  
.
An activated account with your wireless  
service provider  
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include  
tips for getting the most out of your  
smartphone. Some tips are available from a  
A location with wireless coverage for  
your smartphone  
menu: open an application, press Menu  
,
select Options, and then select Tips. Other  
An electrical outlet  
W E L C O M E  
2
                             
tips are available when you select a Tips  
icon in the upper-right corner of a dialog box.  
retailers (look in the computers section), or  
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date  
downloads, troubleshooting, and support  
information, go to  
Online forums: Consult online Treo device  
user discussion groups to swap information  
and learn about topics you may find nowhere  
else. For details, visit http://go.palm.com/  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
If you need more information  
Customer service from your wireless  
service provider: For questions about your  
mobile account or features, contact your  
wireless service providers technical  
support department or your wireless  
service providers customer service and  
billing department.  
Windows Vista™ users: For information on  
using your smartphone and desktop software  
with Windows Vista, visit www.palm.com/  
Books: Many books about Palm OS® devices  
are available from local or online book  
W E L C O M E  
3
                         
W E L C O M E  
4
CHAPTER  
1
Setting up  
You’re about to discover the many things about your  
Palm® Treo755P smartphone that will help you better  
manage your life and have fun, too.  
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll  
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it  
uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up.  
Benefits  
Know where your smartphone  
controls are located  
Establish a link between your  
smartphone and your computer  
Start using your smartphone right  
away  
 
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Smartphone overview  
Front view  
Indicator light (phone  
and charge indicator)  
Earpiece  
5-way navigator and  
Center button  
Power/End  
Applications  
Menu  
Volume button  
Side button  
Email  
Send  
Phone  
Calendar  
Option  
go.palm.com/treo755p/ to find carrying cases  
and other useful accessories.  
DID YOU KNOW? The indicator light is visible  
only when the light is on.  
DID YOU KNOW? When your smartphone screen  
is on, you can press and hold the Side button  
to open an application of your choice; see  
Reassigning buttons for details.  
S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W  
7
                                       
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Back view  
Speaker  
Camera lens  
Self-portrait mirror  
Stylus  
Battery door release  
Infrared  
(IR) port  
MiniSD  
expansion card  
slot  
Headset jack  
Multi-connector  
Microphone  
IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone  
speaker includes a large magnet, so be  
sure to keep your smartphone away from  
credit cards or other items that could be  
demagnetized.  
S M A R T P H O N E O V E R V I E W  
8
                         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Top view  
Installing the battery  
Sound On  
Sound Off  
1
Press the battery door release, and  
slide the battery door downward to  
remove it from your smartphone.  
Ringer switch  
DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all  
sounds, including music, at once; you don’t  
need to hunt for off” or “mute” settings in  
individual applications.  
Battery door  
release  
2
3
Align the metal contacts on the battery  
with the contacts inside the battery  
compartment.  
Insert the battery into the compartment  
at a 45-degree angle, and then press it  
into place.  
I N S T A L L I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
9
         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Battery  
TIP If your smartphone does not turn on, you  
need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still  
does not turn on after you connect the AC  
charger, then do a soft reset. See Performing  
contacts  
Smartphone  
contacts  
Charging the battery  
The battery comes with a sufficient charge  
to complete the setup process and activate  
your phone. After activation, we  
recommend charging your smartphone for  
3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is solid  
green) to give it a full charge. See  
maximizing the life of your smartphone’s  
battery.  
4
5
Slide the battery door onto the back of  
the smartphone until it clicks into place.  
When the language selection screen  
appears, select the language you want  
to use.  
IMPORTANT You must select the same  
language on your smartphone and desktop  
software.  
TIP To avoid draining the battery, charge your  
smartphone every day, especially if you use  
your phone often.  
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to set  
up your smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? If your battery ever becomes  
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on  
your smartphone until you recharge the  
battery or connect your smartphone to a  
power source.  
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
10  
                   
S E T T I N G U P  
1
1
If necessary, connect the international  
adapter to the AC charger plug.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also charge your  
smartphone by connecting it to your computer  
with the sync cable. You can do this with or  
without using the charger cable (see  
2
3
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.  
Connect the charger cable to the  
bottom of the smartphone. Make sure  
the arrow on the connector is facing up,  
toward the screen.  
Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge the  
battery using the sync cable, and if your laptop  
isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain  
the laptops battery.  
4
To confirm that your smartphone is  
charging, check the indicator light on  
your smartphone.  
Solid red indicates that your  
smartphone is charging.  
Solid green indicates that your  
smartphone is fully charged.  
Indicator light  
C H A R G I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
11  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
TIP If the battery is fully drained, it may take a  
TIP To see exactly how much power is left in  
few moments for the indicator light to turn on  
when you begin charging.  
your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.  
TIP If the indicator light doesn’t turn on when  
you connect your smartphone to the AC  
charger, double-check the cable connection  
and the electrical outlet to which it is  
connected.  
Battery icon  
When your smartphone is on (see Turning  
your phone on and off), the onscreen  
battery icon displays the charging status:  
A red lightning bolt indicates that  
the battery is connected to a wall  
outlet and is charging.  
Maximizing battery  
life  
A green lightning bolt indicates  
that the battery is connected to a  
wall outlet and is fully charged.  
Battery life depends on how you use your  
smartphone. You can maximize the life of  
your battery by following a few easy  
guidelines:  
A partial battery without a  
lightning bolt indicates that the  
battery is not connected to a wall  
outlet and it has some power.  
An almost empty battery that is  
red at the bottom indicates that  
you need to charge the battery  
immediately.  
as a spare for long airplane trips or periods  
compatible with your smartphone, go to  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
M A X I M I Z I N G B A T T E R Y L I F E  
12  
                   
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Charge your smartphone whenever  
you’re at your desk, or charge it  
overnight. The Li-ion battery has a much  
longer useful life when it is topped off  
frequently, versus charging it after it is  
fully drained.  
Turn down the screen brightness (see  
Decrease the settings in Power  
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive  
Turn off the Bluetooth® feature if you’re  
not using it. See Connecting to a  
Your smartphone’s wireless features  
(phone, email, messaging, and web)  
and media features (camera, media  
players, eBooks, and games) consume  
more power than its organizer features.  
If you spend a lot of time using the  
wireless and media features, keep an  
eye on the battery icon and charge  
when necessary.  
Making your first call  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If Phone Off  
appears in the title bar, you need to turn on  
off). If No Service appears in the title bar,  
you are outside a wireless coverage area. If  
you believe you are in a wireless coverage  
area and this problem persists, contact  
your wireless service provider for  
If you don’t plan to use the wireless  
features on your smartphone for a  
while, turn off your phone (see Turning  
your phone on and off) and let all calls  
be picked up by voicemail.  
As with any mobile phone, if you are in  
an area with no wireless coverage, your  
smartphone searches for a signal, which  
consumes power. If you cannot move to  
an area of better coverage, temporarily  
turn off your phone. While your phone is  
off, you can continue to use your  
assistance.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
If prompted, press Center  
to turn  
off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard  
(Keyguard) for more info).  
smartphones nonwireless features.  
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L  
13  
                           
S E T T I N G U P  
1
3
4
If you haven’t already activated your phone,  
follow your wireless service providers  
activation steps before continuing  
To increase the volume, press the upper  
half of the Volume button.  
.
To decrease the volume, press the  
lower half of the Volume button.  
Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the  
number you want to call.  
Volume button  
5
6
Press Send  
After you finish the call, press Power/  
End to end the call.  
to dial.  
What’s my phone number?  
1
Make sure your phone is on (see  
TIP You can also dial phone numbers with the  
number pad on the keyboard. See Dialing  
using the keyboard for details.  
2
3
4
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Adjusting call volume  
Info.  
While a call is in progress, press the  
Volume button on the side of your  
smartphone to adjust the call volume.  
M A K I N G Y O U R F I R S T C A L L  
14  
         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Synchronization means you can enter or  
change info on your smartphone or on your  
computer and then sync to automatically  
update the info in both places. There’s no  
need to enter the info twice. We strongly  
recommend that you sync your  
Look here for  
your phone  
number  
smartphone with your computer frequently  
to keep your info up-to-date (and backed  
up) in both locations.  
TIP If your phone number doesn’t appear in  
Phone Info, turn your phone off and on again  
before you recheck Phone Info. If your phone  
number still doesn’t appear, contact your  
wireless service provider to confirm that your  
phone has been activated.  
System requirements  
Your computer should meet the following  
minimum system profiles:  
Windows 2000, XP Service Pack 2 or  
Windows Media Center Edition 2005  
32MB of available memory (RAM)  
170MB of free hard disk space  
CD drive  
Setting up your  
computer  
Available USB port  
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later  
128MB of total memory (RAM)  
190MB of free hard disk space  
CD drive  
You need to install the desktop software  
and connect the sync cable so that you can  
synchronize the info on your computer and  
the info on your smartphone. You can use  
either Palm® Desktop software (included)  
or Microsoft Outlook® for Windows (sold  
separately) as your desktop software.  
Available USB port  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
15  
                                 
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Windows XP users: To sync your info, you When you install the desktop software  
must install Palm Desktop software from  
from the Palm Software Installation CD,  
some third-party applications may be  
quarantined because they are not  
compatible with the Palm OS software  
version 5.4.9 on your new Treo  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone—even if you  
sync with Outlook (sold separately) or  
another third-party application.  
smartphone. Quarantined files are not  
installed on your smartphone, nor are they  
deleted; these files are placed in a new  
folder on your computer: C:\Program  
Files\Palm\device name\PalmOS5  
Incompatible Apps. (On some systems  
Palm may be replaced with palmOne or  
Handspring.)  
Windows Vista users: Before inserting  
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to  
find instructions and information about  
using your smartphone and desktop  
software with Windows Vista.  
Upgrading from another Palm OS® device  
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm  
OS device, skip ahead to Connecting your  
TIP If you have third-party applications on the  
device you are upgrading from, you may want  
to review the info in Upgrading that lists the  
kinds of apps you do not want to try to install  
on your new device. The info in Upgrading is  
also useful if you run into other problems  
during the upgrade process.  
You can transfer all compatible applications  
and information from your previous Palm  
OS® device to your new Treo 755P  
smartphone. This includes your calendar  
events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as  
well as your application settings and any  
compatible third-party applications  
and files.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
16  
                       
S E T T I N G U P  
1
TIP Some third-party utilities allow you to back  
up your old devices information onto an  
expansion card and then transfer the info to  
your Treo 755P smartphone. We do not  
recommend this method because any  
incompatible applications are also transferred  
to your smartphone.  
1
Calculate how much space your apps  
and info occupy on your previous Palm  
OS device:  
2
If the space occupied on your previous  
device is 60MB or less, then go to  
step 3. If the space occupied is greater  
than 60MB, then do any of the following  
to reduce the storage space you’re  
using before you go to the next step:  
From Applications View, open the  
menus.  
Select Info on the App menu.  
At the bottom of the screen, select  
Size.  
Delete any third-party applications  
that you no longer use.  
Look at the numbers on the Free  
Space line and subtract the number  
on the left from the number on the  
right to calculate the space used. For  
example, on the device shown here,  
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that  
4.9MB of space is occupied on this  
device.  
Move large files, such as eBooks and  
images, to an expansion card.  
Move third-party applications to an  
expansion card.  
Purge old info in applications such as  
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),  
and email. Refer to the  
documentation that came with your  
previous device for instructions on  
these items.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
17  
                               
S E T T I N G U P  
1
3
4
Synchronize your previous device with  
your previous desktop software to back  
up your information one last time.  
in the User list in Palm Desktop  
software.)  
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your  
previous device, copy them from your  
Install the desktop synchronization  
software from your new Palm Software previous device to an expansion card or  
Installation CD (see Installing the  
beam them to your new Treo 755P  
smartphone.  
IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new  
Treo 755P smartphone with any previous  
versions of Palm Desktop software.  
6
If you plan to continue using your  
previous device, perform a hard reset to  
remove its associated device name.  
(See the documentation that came with  
your previous device for instructions on  
performing a hard reset.) Each device  
you synchronize with your computer  
must have a unique name. The next  
time you synchronize your previous  
device with your computer, be sure to  
assign it a new name.  
5
During the installation process, sync  
your new Treo smartphone with your  
new desktop software as instructed.  
When prompted, do the following:  
Connect your new smartphone to  
your computer (see Connecting your  
Indicate whether you want to sync  
only the info in your PIM apps  
(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and  
Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding  
apps known to be incompatible).  
If any third-party applications are  
quarantined during the installation, do not  
manually install them. Contact the  
third-party developer for software updates  
and info about compatibility with your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
Select a device name for your new  
smartphone; be sure to select the  
same name that you used for your old  
device. (This is the name that appears  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
18  
                   
S E T T I N G U P  
1
Installing the desktop synchronization  
software  
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a  
Palm OS device and have installed a  
previous version of the desktop software,  
you must install the software from the  
Palm Software Installation CD that came  
with your Treo 755P smartphone.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing  
on a computer at work, make sure your  
computer is configured to let you install  
new software. Contact your companys  
IT department for help.  
3
4
If you are installing on a Mac,  
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,  
and then double-click the  
PalmSoftware.pkg icon.  
When the installation wizard opens,  
follow the onscreen instructions. Please  
note these important points about the  
installation process:  
TIP If you want to sync info with applications  
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft  
Outlook, you need to purchase additional  
third-party sync software. This sync software  
is sometimes called a conduit.  
When the language selection screen  
appears, click the same language you  
selected on your smartphone.  
1
2
Close any apps that are running on your  
computer, including those that are  
minimized. Your computer needs all its  
resources to install the software.  
You can choose which desktop  
software you want to use for  
synchronization: Palm Desktop  
software or Microsoft Outlook.  
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD  
into the CD drive on your computer.  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
19  
                   
S E T T I N G U P  
1
3
Plug the USB sync cable into an  
available USB port or into a powered  
USB hub on your computer.  
TIP To download a trial version of Microsoft  
Outlook and learn about discount offers go to:  
TIP For best performance, plug your sync  
cable directly into a USB port on your  
computer. If your computer has USB ports on  
both the front and back, we suggest using the  
back port; the front port is often a low-power  
port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the  
hub has its own power supply.  
NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your  
desktop email application, select Microsoft  
Outlook as your desktop synchronization  
software. If you select Microsoft Outlook,  
Palm Desktop software will still be installed  
on your computer. When you enter  
information on your computer, be sure to  
enter your information in Microsoft  
Outlook, not in Palm Desktop software.  
4
5
With the sync button facing up, connect  
the sync cable to the bottom of your  
smartphone. Do not press the sync  
button until you are instructed to do so.  
When the install process prompts you  
to connect your smartphone to your  
computer, go to the next section,  
Connect the charger cable to the  
bottom of your smartphone.  
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your  
computer  
1
If necessary, connect the international  
adapter to the AC charger plug.  
Sync  
cable  
2
Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.  
Sync  
button  
S E T T I N G U P Y O U R C O M P U T E R  
20  
               
S E T T I N G U P  
1
You are now ready to synchronize; go to  
corporate server frequently to keep your  
info up-to-date (and backed up) in  
both locations.  
The info from all the following applications  
is updated by default each time you sync  
your smartphone with your desktop  
software:  
Synchronizing  
information—the  
basics  
Synchronizing means that info that is  
entered or updated in one place  
(your smartphone or your computer) is  
automatically updated in the other, so  
there’s no need to enter the info twice. We  
strongly recommend that you sync your  
smartphone with your computer or  
How each application syncs depends on  
your computer type and the desktop  
software you are using, as follows:  
Computer type  
Windows  
Desktop type  
What syncs and where  
Microsoft  
Outlook (sold  
separately)  
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks  
sync with Outlook  
Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop  
software  
Windows  
Mac  
Palm Desktop  
software  
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software  
Palm Desktop  
software  
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S  
21  
                                         
S E T T I N G U P  
1
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,  
3
4
A message indicates that  
synchronization is in progress.  
you must install Palm Desktop software  
from the Palm Software Installation CD  
that came with your Treo 755P  
smartphone—even if you sync with  
Outlook (sold separately) or another  
third-party application. See Installing the  
instructions.  
Wait for a message that indicates that  
the process is complete before you  
disconnect the sync cable.  
TIP If you have problems synchronizing, see  
Synchronization for suggestions.  
TIP For more sync options, including which  
1
Connect your Treo 755P smartphone to  
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you  
now have the option to install bonus  
software. If you choose to install some of  
the bonus software, you need to sync  
again to install the software on your  
smartphone. You can also install bonus  
NOTE If you’re performing initial setup,  
your smartphone should already be  
connected to your computer.  
2
Press the sync button on the sync  
cable.  
TIP For info on locating your pictures and  
videos on your computer, see Viewing  
Sync button  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — T H E B A S I C S  
22  
       
CHAPTER  
2
Moving around on your  
smartphone  
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you  
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the  
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your  
smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the  
same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these  
controls on your Palm® Treo755P smartphone, you’ll be  
driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.  
Benefits  
Find and open applications quickly  
Access extra features with menus  
Access many more characters and  
symbols than are displayed on the  
keyboard  
Move around in applications with  
one hand, using the 5-way  
navigator  
       
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Moving around the  
screen  
TIP Some third-party applications may not  
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must  
use the stylus instead.  
DID YOU KNOW? In this guide, we use arrow  
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.  
These are different from any onscreen arrows  
that you tap with your stylus or select with  
the 5-way to display pick lists.  
To move around the Treo 755P smartphone  
screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for  
one-handed navigation, or you can tap  
items on the screen with the stylus. With  
use, you will find your own favorite way to  
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.  
The 5-way includes the following buttons:  
Center  
Up  
Left  
Right  
Down  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
25  
               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Scrolling through screens  
Up  
or Down to scroll one screen  
at a time.  
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo  
smartphone to move from field to field or  
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an  
page to page, or in some cases to highlight onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of  
an item or option in a list.  
an onscreen scroll bar.  
In list screens, use the 5-way  
to  
select and move between entries such as  
notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In  
individual entry screens—such as a single  
photo or email message—use the 5-way to  
move among the items on the screen or to  
move to another entry.  
Slider  
Scroll arrows  
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens  
and entry screens varies according to  
application. Here are some general  
scrolling tips that apply in most  
applications:  
Highlighting and selecting items  
On most screens, one item—a button, a  
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by  
default. The highlight identifies which item  
is affected by your next action. Use the  
5-way to move the highlight from one item  
to another before opening or selecting it.  
Press Right , Left , Up , or  
Down to move to the next field,  
button, or action in that direction.  
The highlight can take one of two forms,  
depending on what is highlighted:  
In list screens, press and hold Up  
Down to scroll one screen at a time.  
or  
Border glow: When an onscreen  
When inside a text field, press Right  
button (such as OK or Cancel) or pick list  
is highlighted, the item displays a glow  
around its border. If an entire list screen  
or Left to scroll to the next character  
or word, press Up  
or Down to  
scroll between lines, or press and hold  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
26  
                                     
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
is highlighted, the glow appears at the  
top and bottom of the screen only.  
TIP When a border appears at the top and  
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the  
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.  
TIP After you open an application (see  
Opening applications), experiment with using  
the 5-way to highlight various screen  
elements.  
Highlighting text  
You can use the stylus to highlight text on  
the screen.  
Tap and drag the stylus across the text  
you want to highlight.  
To highlight a word, double-tap it.  
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.  
Colored background: When a phone  
number, text, an email address, a web  
link, or an item in a list is highlighted,  
the item is displayed as white text  
against a colored background. Examples  
of lists include the Contacts list, the  
Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list.  
Accessing command buttons  
In most applications, command buttons  
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the  
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you  
can jump directly to these buttons instead  
of scrolling to them.  
From a list screen, such as the Contacts  
list or Memos list, press Right to  
jump to the first button.  
After highlighting an item, you can select or  
activate it by pressing Center  
, or by  
tapping the item with the stylus.  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
27  
                                               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
From a screen where you create or edit  
entries, such as Edit Contacts, press  
Center  
to jump to the first button.  
From a dialog box, such as Edit  
Categories, press Up  
or Down to  
scroll to the buttons.  
KEY TERM Dialog box A set of options and  
command buttons that are enclosed by a  
border and that enable you to carry out a  
specific task.  
Menu shortcut  
2
3
4
Press Right and Left to switch  
between menus.  
Selecting menu items  
Many applications have menus to give you  
access to additional features. These menus  
are usually hidden from view, but they  
Press Up  
and Down to highlight a  
menu item.  
Press Center  
to select the menu  
appear when you press Menu  
. To get  
item, or press Menu  
to close the  
the most out of your Treo smartphone, it’s  
a good idea to familiarize yourself with the  
additional features available through the  
various application menus.  
menu and cancel your selection.  
TIP Most menu items have menu shortcuts  
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,  
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t  
have to see the menu item to use the menu  
shortcut. For example, when you’re in  
Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a  
new event.  
1
Press Menu  
to display an  
application’s menus.  
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
28  
                       
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Selecting options in a pick list  
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick  
list.  
A range of options is often presented in a  
type of menu called a pick list, which can  
be identified by a downward-pointing  
arrow. Pick lists are different from the  
application menus previously described.  
The application menus give you access to  
additional features, and pick lists let you  
select the contents for a particular field.  
Tap the item you want from the list.  
To exit the pick list without making a  
selection, tap outside the list.  
You can select items from a pick list with  
the 5-way or the stylus.  
5-way: Use the 5-way  
to highlight  
the pick list, and then press Center  
to display the items in the list.  
Press Up  
and Down to highlight  
the item you want.  
Press Center  
to select the  
highlighted item.  
To exit the pick list without making a  
selection, press Left or Right  
.
M O V I N G A R O U N D T H E S C R E E N  
29  
                   
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Using the keyboard  
Backlight  
Backspace  
Return  
Option  
Shift/Find  
Menu  
Space  
Alt  
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters  
TIP When using the keyboard, most people  
find it easiest to hold the Treo smartphone  
with two hands and use the tips of both  
thumbs to press the keys.  
To enter lowercase letters, press the  
desired keys.  
To enter an uppercase letter, press  
Shift/Find  
key. You don’t need to press and hold  
Shift while entering a letter. When Shift  
is active, the  
lower-right corner of the screen.  
and then press a letter  
DID YOU KNOW? The Treo smartphone includes  
a keyboard backlight that turns on and off  
when the screen turns on or off. The backlight  
also dims when an active call lasts longer than  
a specified period of time. See Optimizing  
power settings to adjust the automatic  
shut-off and dimming intervals.  
symbol appears in the  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
30  
                               
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find  
DID YOU KNOW? Some application views  
automatically default to Option Lock, such as  
the Dial Pad View in the Phone application or  
in the Calculator. In this case, you do not need  
to press Option to enter numbers.  
twice. To turn it off, press Shift/  
Find  
once. When Caps Lock is on,  
the  
symbol appears in the lower-right  
corner of the screen.  
Entering numbers, punctuation, and  
symbols  
Entering other symbols and accented  
characters  
Number, punctuation, and symbol  
characters appear above the letters on  
the keys. To enter these characters, do one  
of the following:  
Symbols and accented characters that do  
not appear on the keyboard are sometimes  
called alternate characters because they  
are entered using the Alt  
key.  
1
Enter the character that corresponds to  
the symbol or accented character you  
want. See the table on the next page.  
Symbol  
Letter  
2
3
Press Alt  
.
Press Option  
, and then press the  
key with the desired character shown  
above the letter. You don’t need to press  
and hold Option while pressing the  
second key. When Option is active, the  
symbol appears in the lower-right  
corner of the screen.  
Press Up , Down , Right , or  
Left to highlight the desired  
character.  
4
Press Center  
character.  
to insert the  
To turn Option Lock on, press Option  
twice. To turn it off, press Option  
once. When Option Lock is on, the  
DID YOU KNOW? Alternate characters are  
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For  
example, the alternate characters for the e key  
are é, è, ë, ê, and  
.
symbol  
appears in the lower-right  
corner of the screen.  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
31  
                             
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
0
Symbols and accented characters  
Press…  
Then press  
Alt to  
Press…  
Then press  
Alt to  
Press…  
Then press  
Alt to  
select…  
á à ä â ã å æ  
Á À Ä Â Ã Å Æ  
ß
select…  
select…  
ú ù ü û  
Ú Ù Ü Û  
x ¤  
a
n
ñ
u
A
N
Ñ
U
b or B  
o
ó ò ö ô œ õ  
x or X  
c
ç ¢ ©  
O
Ó Ò Ö Ô Œ Õ  
y
Y
!
ý ÿ  
C
Ç ¢ ©  
p or P  
r or R  
s
Ý Ÿ  
e
é è ë ê  
É È Ë Ê  
í ì ï î  
®
¡
E
ß š  
ß Š  
?
:
¿
i
S
:-) :-( ;-)  
£ ¥ ¢  
I
Í Ì Ï Î  
t or T  
$
l or L  
£
Press Alt  
characters:  
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these  
£ ¥ ¢ [ ] { } < > « » © ® ™ ~ ^ ø |  
; _ • \ % = ° ÷  
U S I N G T H E K E Y B O A R D  
32  
         
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Each quick button opens two applications:  
Opening applications  
To open a button’s primary application,  
simply press the button.  
When you open an application using either  
Applications View or an application button,  
you automatically close the application you  
were previously using.  
Button  
Primary application  
Phone  
Calendar  
Email  
Using the quick buttons  
The front of the Treo 755P smartphone has  
three buttons that you can use to open  
applications. The fourth button opens  
Applications View (see Using Applications  
View).  
To access a button’s secondary  
application, press Option  
and then  
press the quick button.  
TIP You can customize the quick buttons  
yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.  
Buttons  
Secondary application  
Web  
+
+
World Clock  
Messaging  
Phone  
+
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Option + Menu dims  
your smartphone screen.  
Option  
Calendar  
Applications  
Email  
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
33  
                                         
M O V I N G A R O U N D O N Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
2
Using Applications View  
In Applications View, you can also do any of  
the following:  
You can access all available applications  
through Applications View.  
Press Applications  
repeatedly to  
cycle through various categories of  
for more info on categories.  
1
2
Press Applications  
.
Use the 5-way  
application you want to use.  
to highlight the  
Enter the first few letters of the  
application’s name to highlight it. For  
example, if you enter P, it highlights  
Phone; if you then enter R, it highlights  
Prefs. If you pause and then enter R, it  
highlights the first application that starts  
with R.  
TIP You can also press and hold Applications  
from any screen on your smartphone to select  
from a list of your most recently used apps.  
3
Press Center  
to open the selected  
application.  
O P E N I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
34  
                   
CHAPTER  
3
Your phone  
The Phone application is your home base for making and  
receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to  
stay in touch with.  
You can effectively manage multiple calls, such as sending text  
messages to ignored calls, swapping between calls, and  
creating three-way conference calls. Your Palm® Treo755P  
smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.  
You can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can  
send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web  
pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out if  
you have new email messages.  
Benefits  
Stay in touch: you choose how  
Have fun: add wallpaper and  
ringtones  
Save time with shortcuts to your  
favorite info  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
example, when you’re on an airplane and  
want to look at your calendar.  
Turning your  
smartphone on and  
off  
1
Press and release Power/End  
to wake up the screen.  
TIP You can also press any of the quick buttons  
or the Applications button to wake up your  
smartphone screen.  
NOTE Throughout this guide we use the  
term smartphone to describe your device  
and its physical attributes. We use the term  
phone to describe the features of your  
smartphone that let you connect to your  
wireless service providers network to  
make and receive calls and transmit data.  
Power/End  
Center  
The phone and the screen of your  
smartphone can be turned on and off  
separately. This means that you can wake  
up the screen to use just the organizer  
features of your smartphone, without  
turning on the phone. Also, when the  
screen is turned off, the phone can be on  
and ready for you to receive and make  
calls.  
2
3
Press Center  
to turn off Keyguard.  
For more info about turning Keyguard on  
Press and release Power/End  
to turn off the screen.  
Waking up the screen  
TIP You can set how long the screen stays on.  
Press Applications, select Preferences,  
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off  
after setting.  
Wake up the screen and leave the phone  
turned off when you want to use only the  
organizer features of your smartphone; for  
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F  
37  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Turning your phone on and off  
When your smartphone locates a signal  
(provided you are in a coverage area),  
your wireless service providers name  
When your phone is on, it is connected to  
your wireless service providers network  
(provided you are in a coverage area) so  
that you can make and receive phone calls  
and use wireless services such as email,  
messaging, and the web browser. During  
initial setup, your phone is on by default, so  
you can use wireless services right away.  
and the signal-strength  
icon  
appear at the top of the screen,  
indicating that you can use the phone  
and Internet features (if supported by  
the mobile network).  
TIP If you’re outside a coverage area, No  
Service appears in the upper-left corner.  
If you turn off your phone, you can still use  
the organizer features such as Contacts  
and Calendar, as well as the media  
features, such as the pTunes music  
application and Pics&Videos. This is  
sometimes referred to as flight mode and  
is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing  
battery life.  
3
Press and hold Power/End  
again to turn off your phone. When your  
phone is off, Phone Off appears at the  
top of the Phone application screen and  
your smartphone is not connected to  
any mobile network. You can still use  
the nonwireless features of your  
smartphone, such as Contacts,  
1
2
Wake up the screen.  
Press and hold Power/End  
to  
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.  
turn on your phone.  
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,  
you hear a series of tones when you turn your  
phone on and off (see Silencing sounds).  
T U R N I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E O N A N D O F F  
38  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Opening the Phone application  
Press Phone to open the Phone  
application’s Main View.  
Status icons  
Dial Pad  
3
Tap Dial or press Send  
the call.  
to make  
Favorite  
buttons  
TIP If you changed the wallpaper in the Phone  
applications Main View (see Customizing the  
access the Dial Pad. From the Phone  
applications Main View, press Send, and then  
select Dial Pad.  
Making calls  
Your smartphone offers several options for  
making calls. As you become familiar with  
your smartphone, you’ll discover which  
method you prefer.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can paste numbers directly  
into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another  
application and press Phone to switch to the  
Dial Pad. Open the Edit menu and select  
Paste. Press Send to dial.  
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad  
Dialing using the keyboard  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Enter the phone number by tapping the  
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.  
Press the numbered keys to enter the  
phone number. (You don’t need to press  
Option.)  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
39  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
3
Using the keyboard, just start entering  
one of the following for the contact you  
want to call:  
First name (JOH for John)  
Last name (SMI for Smith)  
First initial and last name (JSM for  
John Smith)  
For example, entering SM would display  
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and Sally  
Martin. Entering JSM finds only John  
Smith.  
3
Press Send  
to make the call.  
TIP You can also press Center on the 5-way to  
make the call.  
Text appears  
here as you  
enter it  
Dialing by contact name  
Before you can dial a call by contact name,  
you must create some contacts (see  
Adding a contact), or import them by  
TIP To restart your search, press Backspace to  
delete letters you’ve entered. Or select  
Cancel to return to Main View.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
4
5
Select the number you want to dial.  
Press Send  
to dial.  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
40  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
DID YOU KNOW? If you want to be able to dial by  
entering a contact name in the Phone  
applications Main View (instead of a phone  
number), you can change a setting to do that  
TIP To see more info for a contact, highlight  
the name and press Center on the 5-way to  
view the address, company, and other details.  
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button  
DID YOU KNOW? If you select a contact from  
Your smartphone comes with a few  
your Contacts list when you create a  
speed-dial favorite, you can see all the  
numbers for that contact. Highlight that  
contacts speed-dial favorite button, and  
press Space on the keyboard.  
predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but  
you can also create your own favorites. See  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
Press Down to access Favorites.  
Use the 5-way to highlight the  
speed-dial favorite you want.  
.
4
Press Center  
to make the call.  
Dialing from a web page or message  
Look for the  
speed-dial favorite from other types of  
favorites.  
icon to distinguish a  
Your smartphone recognizes most phone  
numbers that appear on web pages or in  
text or email messages.  
1
Select the phone number on the web  
page or in the message.  
TIP To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly  
press Down or Right on the 5-way to scroll to  
other Favorites pages.  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
41  
                 
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
To select from your most recently dialed  
numbers: From the Phone applications  
Main View, press Send  
to open the  
Redial list, select the number you want to  
call, and then press Send  
again to  
dial.  
2
3
Press Center  
Number dialog box.  
to open the Dial  
Select Dial to dial the number.  
TIP If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to  
highlight and dial a phone number on a web  
page or in a message, it means that your  
smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as  
a phone number.  
To select from a chronological list of  
calls: Select the Call Log favorite button.  
You can also access your Call Log from the  
Phone applications Main View by pressing  
Redialing a recently called number  
Send  
and selecting Call Log from  
To dial the last number: From the Phone  
applications Main View, press and hold  
the Redial list.  
Send  
to dial the last number you  
called.  
M A K I N G C A L L S  
42  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Receiving calls  
To receive calls, your phone must be on.  
This is different from having only the  
on and off). When your phone is off, your  
calls go to voicemail.  
DID YOU KNOW? If music is playing and a call  
arrives, the phone rings softly. The music  
pauses automatically if you answer the call  
and resumes when you hang up.  
Ending a call  
Do one of the following:  
Press Power/End  
.
Select Hang Up All.  
Press the button on the headset (if the  
headset is attached).  
DID YOU KNOW? If an entry in your Call Log  
supports text messaging, you can send a text  
message to that number. Highlight the entry  
in your Call Log, open the Record menu, and  
then select Message to address a message to  
the selected number.  
TIP See a photo of the person calling you!  
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in  
R E C E I V I N G C A L L S  
43  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
To answer a call, do one of the following:  
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound  
Off . This immediately silences all  
system sounds, including the ringer.  
Press Send  
.
Select Answer.  
DID YOU KNOW? When you silence the ringer  
while it is ringing, you can either answer the  
call or let it ring through to voicemail.  
Press the headset button (if the  
headset is attached).  
TIP The headset button may work differently  
on headsets other than the one provided with  
your smartphone.  
Using voicemail  
To ignore a call, do one of the following:  
Your wireless service providers service  
includes voicemail. Keep in mind that  
airtime and other charges apply when  
using voicemail from your smartphone.  
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/  
End  
or select Ignore.  
Send the caller a text message: Select  
Ignore with Text. This option sends the  
call to voicemail and opens a text message  
addressed to the caller.  
Setting up voicemail  
TIP If you can’t connect to your wireless  
service providers voicemail system, contact  
your wireless service provider for assistance.  
NOTE Sending text messages to land line  
phones may not be supported.  
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do  
one of the following:  
1
2
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
you are in a coverage area.  
Press any key on your smartphone  
Press Phone  
.
except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.  
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L  
44  
                               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
3
4
Press and hold 1 or select the  
Voicemail favorite button to dial your  
wireless service provider’s automated  
voicemail system.  
Listening to voicemail messages  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail  
system, or select the Voicemail favorite  
button.  
Follow the voice prompts to set up your  
voicemail.  
3
Enter your voicemail password using  
the keyboard.  
Voicemail notification  
When you have a new voicemail message,  
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.  
TIP Remember, you do not need to press  
Option to enter numbers, *, or # while on a  
call.  
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select  
OK.  
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the  
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a  
favorite button for details), you can select  
this button to enter your password.  
To play the message, select Listen.  
When you have messages that you have  
not listened to, a Voicemail icon also  
appears in the title bar of the Phone  
application. You can select this icon to  
listen to your voicemail.  
TIP If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar  
after you listen to your messages, you can  
clear the voicemail icon. Open the Options  
menu, select Phone Preferences, and then  
select Clear Voicemail Icon.  
U S I N G V O I C E M A I L  
45  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Use the 5-way  
onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons  
do:  
or stylus to select the  
What can I do when  
I’m on a call?  
Ends the call immediately. You can  
also press the headset button (if the  
headset is attached).  
When you make or receive a call, Active  
Call View appears.  
Turns on the speakerphone. When  
the speakerphone is on, you can  
take the smartphone away from  
your ear and use other features  
during a call. For example, you can  
check your calendar or look up  
contact info.  
Call  
duration  
Callers  
name and  
number  
Turns off the speakerphone when it  
is on.  
TIP If the screen dims during a call, press any  
key except Power/End to restore the screen  
brightness. Be careful not to press Power/End  
to restore the screen brightness because this  
ends the call.  
Replaces the Spkr-phone button  
when a Bluetooth® headset is  
attached. Select this button to  
transfer the call from the Bluetooth  
headset to the built-in earpiece.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can set how long the  
screen stays at full brightness during phone  
details.  
Places the current call on hold.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
46  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Enables you to place another call  
while the first call is on hold. For  
information on handling a second  
Switching applications during a call  
You can use many other applications on  
your smartphone while holding a phone  
conversation, including the organizer and  
text messaging features. You cannot,  
however, make a data connection while on  
a call. This means that you cannot browse  
the web or send and receive email  
messages while on a call.  
Opens the Dial Pad so you can  
manually dial additional numbers,  
such as an extension or a response  
to a voice prompt.  
Dials any extra digits (such as a  
password or an extension) that you  
assigned to a favorite button. This  
button replaces the Dial Pad button  
during outgoing calls to numbers  
that include predefined extra digits.  
information on defining extra digits.  
1
Do one of the following:  
Select Hold to pause your  
conversation while you view the other  
application.  
Select Spkr-phone to continue the  
conversation while you view the other  
application.  
Connect a headset (see Using a  
Mutes the microphone so that you  
cannot be heard.  
2
3
Press Applications  
.
Select the icon for the application you  
want to open.  
DID YOU KNOW? Do you accidentally press  
onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You  
can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive  
feature during your calls; see Locking your  
screen.  
4
Press Phone  
anytime to return to  
Active Call View.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
47  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
the number into the first available phone  
number field for that contact.  
TIP You can also press Phone to toggle  
between Active Call View and Main View in  
the Phone app, so you can open a favorite by  
selecting its button.  
To decline adding this number, select  
Cancel.  
To disable the Add New Number  
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this  
again box.  
Saving phone numbers  
After you complete an outgoing call to a  
number that is not in your Contacts list,  
you are prompted to add the number to  
your Contacts list. You are also prompted  
to add new numbers from incoming calls  
with caller ID.  
TIP You can turn the Add New Number  
prompt on and off. From the Phone  
applications Main View, open the Options  
menu, and select Phone Preferences. To turn  
this option on, check the Ask to add  
unknown phone numbers after calls box.  
To turn this option off, uncheck this box.  
If you don’t add a number right away, follow  
these steps to add it later.  
1
In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently  
called number), highlight the number  
you want to save.  
2
3
4
5
Press Menu  
.
To create a new contact entry for this  
number, select Create a New Contact,  
and enter the contacts info.  
Select Add Contact.  
Enter the information for the entry.  
Select Done.  
To add this number to an existing  
contact entry, select Add to a Contact,  
and then select the contact. This pastes  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
48  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Making a second call  
DID YOU KNOW? When the second call is an  
outgoing call, you can conference the two  
calls, but you cannot swap between them.  
You can make a second call while your first  
call is still active.  
When the second call is an incoming call, you  
can swap between the two calls, but you  
cannot conference them.  
1
Dial the first number and wait until the  
person answers.  
2
3
4
Select Hold.  
When two calls are active and you press  
Power/End, you hang up both calls. If the  
second call is an outgoing call, you can return  
to the first call by waiting for the person on  
the second call to hang up. If you accidentally  
hang up both calls, your smartphone  
automatically dials the number that was on  
hold.  
Select Add Call.  
Dial the second number using any of  
5
When the Dial another call prompt  
appears, select Yes .  
When two calls are in progress, Active Call  
View includes two status lines, each  
representing one of the calls.  
Answering a second call (call waiting)  
When you are on a call, you can receive a  
second call. When the second call comes  
in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call  
Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any  
of the following to handle the second call:  
To place the current call on hold and  
answer the new call, press Send  
or select Answer.  
To send the new call to voicemail, select  
Ignore.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
49  
                         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
To send the new call to voicemail and  
send the caller a text message, select  
Ignore with Text.  
To hang up the current call and answer  
the new call, press Power/End  
.
When the incoming call message  
reappears, select Answer or press  
Send  
.
After you answer a second call, you can  
switch between the original call and the  
second call by selecting Swap.  
Making a conference call  
When you are on a call and place a second  
outgoing call, you can join the two calls in a  
conference session, provided that the  
service is available in your area. Please  
contact your wireless service provider for  
more information. Additional charges may  
apply and minutes in your mobile account  
may be deducted for each call you place.  
3
To end the conference, press Power/  
End to end all the calls.  
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Send during a  
conference call usually hangs up the second  
call. However, depending on your network  
connection, you may occasionally hang up the  
first call.  
1
While the first call is in progress, place a  
second call.  
2
Select Conf. This joins the two calls in a  
conference session.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
50  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Using Flash mode during a call  
If you have one call in progress, to  
make an outgoing second call, dial the  
number using any of the methods  
described in Making calls.  
Flash mode enables you to manually  
manage your calls while one or more calls  
are active. This mode is often used during a  
conference call when one of the calls has  
ended but the other remains connected.  
If you have one call in progress and  
place an outgoing second call, press  
Send  
after establishing a  
1
Press Send  
View.  
from Active Call  
connection with the second party to  
set up a conference session using  
three-way calling.  
2
If the Do you want to switch to Flash  
mode prompt appears, select Yes.  
If you have two calls in conference,  
press Send  
to hang up one of  
the calls; you can then dial another  
number and place the new caller into  
the conference session.  
4
To exit Flash mode and end all the calls,  
press Power/End  
.
Forwarding calls  
Please check with your wireless service  
provider about availability and pricing of  
forwarding calls to another phone; call  
forwarding is not available in all areas, and  
additional charges may apply.  
3
While in Flash mode, do any of the  
following:  
If you have one call in progress and  
answer an incoming second call,  
press Send  
to swap between  
the calls.  
W H A T C A N  
I
D O W H E N I ’ M O N  
A
C A L L ?  
51  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask your wireless  
Defining favorite  
buttons  
service provider for call forwarding codes.  
You need the codes to enable and disable  
call forwarding. You may also need to  
modify the following steps based on your  
wireless service providers instructions.  
Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite  
buttons for quick access to the following  
common tasks:  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Enter your wireless service providers  
call forwarding code followed by the  
number where you want to forward  
your calls.  
Dialing a phone number (speed dial)  
Accessing your Call Log  
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad  
Opening an application  
3
4
Press Send  
View.  
from Active Call  
Accessing a web page  
Addressing a text or email message  
Call your smartphone to confirm that  
call forwarding is active.  
Accessing voicemail (preset on your  
Treo smartphone)  
When you’re ready to turn off call  
forwarding, open the Phone application  
and enter the code to disable your wireless  
service providers call forwarding feature.  
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S  
52  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Your wireless service provider may preset  
favorite buttons on your smartphone that  
are customized for their services, and you  
may not be able to edit or delete these  
preset favorite buttons. However, you can  
always customize the remaining favorite  
buttons to perform any of the supported  
tasks.  
TIP If there are no blank buttons on the current  
Favorites page, press Right on the 5-way to  
scroll through the other pages. If all your  
favorites are full, you can delete a favorite to  
make room for a new one (see Deleting a  
3
Enter a label for the favorite:  
If the entry is for an existing contact,  
select Lookup. Start entering the last  
name of the contact, and select the  
contact when it appears in the lookup  
list.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you’re upgrading from a  
previous Treo smartphone, your favorites may  
be transferred along with your other info.  
However, you may need to rearrange the  
order in which your favorites appear by  
opening the Record menu and then selecting  
Edit Favorites Pages.  
If the entry is for a new contact, enter  
the label, press Down , and enter  
the number.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a special  
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller  
ID ringtone for details.  
Creating a speed-dial favorite button  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Use the 5-way to select a blank favorite  
button.  
4
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which you  
can press and hold from the Phone  
application to instantly dial this  
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S  
53  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
speed-dial number. (The Quick Key  
works only from the Main view of the  
phone application.)  
5
6
Enter a label for the favorite and enter  
any other necessary information on the  
screen.  
5
(Optional) Select More, and then select  
advanced options:  
(Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which  
you can press and hold to open the  
favorite from the Phone application.  
(The Quick Key works only from the  
Main view of the phone application.)  
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits  
to dial, such as a password or  
extension. To enter a one-second  
pause, insert a comma between digits.  
To add a longer pause, enter more  
commas.  
7
Select OK.  
DID YOU KNOW? When creating a Message or  
Email favorite, you can enter multiple  
addresses; simply separate each address with  
a comma. This is an easy way to send  
messages to a group of people.  
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials  
predefined extra digits immediately  
after dialing the phone number, when  
checked.  
Editing a favorite button  
6
Select OK.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Creating other types of favorite buttons  
Use the 5-way  
to access  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Favorites.  
Use the 5-way  
Favorites.  
to access  
3
Highlight the favorite button you want to  
edit.  
3
4
Select a blank button.  
4
5
Press Menu  
.
Select the Types pick list and select Call  
Log, Dial Pad, Application, Message,  
Email, or Web Link.  
Select Edit Favorites Button on the  
Record menu.  
6
Make the desired changes. For  
example, you can add a Quick Key,  
D E F I N I N G F A V O R I T E B U T T O N S  
54  
                                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
which you can press and hold to  
instantly open the favorite from the  
Phone application. (The Quick Key  
works only from the Main view of the  
phone application.)  
Using a phone  
headset  
You can connect a phone headset for  
hands-free operation. If you need to use  
your phone while driving and this is  
permitted in your area, we recommend  
using a phone headset (wired stereo  
headset included) or a hands-free car kit  
(sold separately).  
7
Select OK.  
TIP You can also organize your buttons on  
various Favorites pages. Open the Record  
menu and select Edit Favorites Pages. Drag  
and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move  
a favorite to another page, drag the button  
onto the page icon at the bottom of the  
screen.  
In addition to the stereo headset included  
with your smartphone, your smartphone is  
compatible with the following types of  
headsets that are sold separately:  
Deleting a favorite button  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm  
connector (3-pin or 4-pin)  
Use the 5-way  
to access  
Favorites.  
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled  
with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless  
technology  
3
Highlight the favorite button you want to  
delete.  
4
5
Press Menu  
.
TIP The headset designed for Treo 180/270/  
300 devices is not compatible with your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
Select Edit Favorites Button on the  
Record menu.  
6
7
Select Delete.  
Select OK.  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
55  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Check the specifications for your headset  
or car kit to confirm compatibility. When in with your smartphone, you can press the  
doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product headset button to perform any of the  
When using the headset that is included  
is compatible with Treo 755P smartphones. following tasks:  
Answer an incoming call  
to http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
Answer a call-waiting call  
Pick up a call that is on hold  
NOTE You cannot use a headset with  
Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to  
music files.  
Switch between two calls (if the second  
call is incoming)  
Join two calls in a conference (if the  
second call is outgoing)  
3.5mm connector to listen to music files, you  
need to purchase a 2.5mm stereo adapter.  
Visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ for more  
info on audio accessories.  
Hang up all calls in progress  
TIP The headset button may work differently  
on other headsets.  
Using a wired headset  
Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free  
device  
Microphone  
Headset  
button  
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for  
example, your smartphone and a hands-free  
device—that can connect because each  
device finds the same passkey on the other  
device. Once you form a partnership with a  
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to  
connect with that device again. Partnership is  
also known as paired relationship, pairing,  
trusted device, and trusted pair.  
Speakers  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
56  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Once you set up a partnership with a  
Bluetooth headset or car kit, you can  
communicate with that device whenever it  
is turned on and within range. Bluetooth  
range is up to 30 feet/10 meters in  
optimum environmental conditions.  
Performance and range may be reduced by  
physical obstacles, radio interference from  
nearby electronic equipment, and other  
factors.  
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that  
identifies your smartphone when it is  
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
TIP If you hear a headset buzz or experience  
poor microphone performance, your headset  
may be incompatible with your smartphone.  
NOTE Use the same device name for all  
your Bluetooth connections. If you change  
the device name, you need to re-create any  
partnerships you have already created.  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your  
headset or car kit to accept a connection  
from another Bluetooth device. See the  
documentation that came with your  
hands-free device for instructions.  
4
5
Keep Visibility set to Hidden, and then  
select Setup Devices.  
Select Hands-free Setup.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth  
icon in the title bar.  
2
Select Bluetooth On.  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
57  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
7
After you finish setting up the device,  
select Done to return to Trusted  
Devices View.  
NOTE For some car kits, you need to  
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your  
smartphone to complete the partnership  
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in  
Trusted Devices View, press Menu  
and then select Connect  
,
.
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
create a partnership with the specific  
hands-free device. When prompted,  
enter a passkey.  
8
(Optional) Enable advanced hands-free  
features by pressing the Multifunction  
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.  
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices  
have a predefined passkey; if your device  
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in  
the documentation for that device. Other  
devices provide a screen where you enter  
a passkey that you make up. In either case,  
you must use the same passkey on both  
your smartphone and your hands-free  
device. We recommend that where  
possible, you make up a passkey of 16  
alphanumeric characters (letters and  
numerals only) to improve the security of  
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,  
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be  
deciphered.  
You can tell that the connection is  
successful when you see a light-blue  
headset icon in the title bar of the Phone  
application. You can now use your  
smartphone with the Bluetooth hands-free  
device.  
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device  
After you create a partnership with your  
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it  
on within range (up to 30 feet/10 meters),  
your smartphone automatically routes all  
calls to the hands-free device instead of to  
the earpiece on your smartphone. When a  
call comes in, your smartphone rings and  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
58  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
the hands-free device beeps. Even if you  
answer the call on your smartphone, the  
call goes to the hands-free device. If you  
prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your  
smartphone, you can change the settings  
on your smartphone to do this; see  
Transfer an outgoing call from the  
earpiece on your smartphone to the  
hands-free device  
Ignore an incoming call  
Redial the last number you called from  
the hands-free device  
DID YOU KNOW? If you have more than one  
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you  
connected to becomes the active device. To  
switch between devices, disconnect the  
active device before you try to connect to the  
other device.  
TIP If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free  
device and you want to return to the earpiece  
during a call, select Cancel Bluetooth in  
Active Call View. To return the call to the  
hands-free device, open the Options menu  
and select Connect Bluetooth.  
Customizing advanced settings for your  
hands-free device  
The features of your hands-free device vary  
by model. Check the documentation for  
your hands-free device for details about  
these features. Your smartphone can  
You can set whether your hands-free  
device automatically answer calls, provided  
the device supports this feature.  
support the following actions, provided that  
your hands-free device also supports them:  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Hands-free  
Do one of the following:  
and select  
.
2
3
.
Answer an incoming call  
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting  
call  
To send all calls to your hands-free  
device: Check the Always route calls to  
handsfree box. Select the Auto answer  
pick list and select whether you want  
Place a call on hold and answer a  
call-waiting call  
Hang up a single call  
U S I N G  
A
P H O N E H E A D S E T  
59  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
your hands-free device to automatically  
answer incoming calls and how quickly  
it answers.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
To choose between the earpiece on  
your smartphone and your  
Display Options.  
4
Set any of the following options:  
hands-free device on a call-by-call  
basis: Uncheck the Always route calls  
to handsfree box. When the phone  
rings, you can answer the call with your  
hands-free device by pressing the  
multifunction button on your hands-free  
device, or you can answer the call with  
the earpiece on your smartphone by  
using the controls on your smartphone  
Show…: Sets whether the Dial Pad or  
wallpaper appears in the Phone  
application’s Main View. If you select  
Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail  
image and then select an image to use  
as wallpaper.  
TIP If you select the Show Wallpaper option,  
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the  
Phone applications Main View, press Send to  
open the Redial list, and then select Dial Pad.  
4
Select Done.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also set the  
background for the Calendar Agenda View.  
calendar for details.  
Customizing phone  
settings  
Customizing the Phone application’s  
Main View  
Phone Display Options let you customize  
the appearance and entry mode of the  
Phone applications Main View.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
60  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether  
Favorites appear in the Phone  
application’s Main View.  
Rows: Sets the number of favorite  
button rows that appear in the Phone  
application’s Main View.  
5
Select OK.  
Selecting ringtones  
Typing: Sets whether typing enters  
numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a  
contact search.  
You can set various tones for various types  
of incoming calls.  
TIP If you select the Typing starts contacts  
search option, you can still enter numbers in  
the Dial Pad by pressing Option before  
entering the first number.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can download any  
compatible ringtone directly to your  
web page). You can also download ringtones  
to your computer and then email them to your  
smartphone.  
Show Calendar event: Sets whether  
the current event from the Calendar  
application appears in the Phone  
application’s Main View. When this  
option is enabled, you can then select  
this event to jump to the Calendar  
application.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
Preferences.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
61  
                             
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
4
Select the Application pick list and  
select Ring Tones.  
ID who is not in your Contacts or  
Favorites.  
Roaming: A special tone for incoming  
calls when you’re outside your home  
mobile network.  
9
Select Done.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a ringtone to a  
contact or to an entire category of contacts.  
Ringtones assigned to individual contacts  
override the ringtone assigned to a category  
of contacts.  
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Creating and managing ringtones  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select  
how you want your smartphone to  
vibrate upon an incoming call.  
You can also record sounds and use them  
as ringtones.  
7
8
(Optional) Uncheck the Escalate ring  
tone volume box if you want the ring to  
remain at the same volume regardless  
of how long it rings.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
Preferences  
Select Manage  
.
Select ringtones from the following pick  
lists:  
4
.
Known Caller: An incoming call from  
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.  
Unknown Caller: An incoming call  
from someone identified by caller  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
62  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
5
Do one of the following:  
4
Select the Application pick list and  
select Phone Alerts.  
To record a sound, select New  
.
To play a sound, select it with the  
5-way  
To delete a sound, highlight it and  
press Backspace  
To send a sound, highlight it and  
select Send  
.
.
.
6
Select Done twice.  
TIP You can also create a new sound by  
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.  
5
6
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select  
how you want your smartphone to  
vibrate upon an incoming call.  
Selecting Phone alert tones  
You can set various tones for various types  
of alerts.  
7
Select alert tones from the following  
pick lists:  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new  
voicemail message has arrived.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
Preferences.  
Coverage in/out: Indicates that you  
moved into or out of a coverage area.  
Signal faded: Indicates that the signal  
lost strength and a call was dropped.  
8
Select Done.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
63  
                     
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Adjusting call volume  
Assigning a caller ID ringtone  
While a call is in progress, press the  
Volume button on the side of your  
smartphone to adjust the call volume.  
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is  
calling before you even look at your  
smartphone. This is a great way to identify  
calls from important people in your life and  
to screen calls youd prefer not to answer.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
Open the contact to whom you want to  
give a caller ID ringtone.  
Volume button  
Side button  
4
5
Select Edit.  
Select the Ringtone pick list and select  
a tone for this contact entry.  
Adjusting ringer volume  
When a call is not in progress and music is  
not playing, press the Volume button on  
the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust  
ringer volume, and then press the Side  
button to confirm your selection.  
6
Select OK.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
64  
             
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
5
Select the Picture box and do one of  
the following:  
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire  
category of contacts. For example, use a  
special ringtone for categories such as Family,  
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category  
pick list in the upper-right corner and select  
Edit Categories. Select the category, and  
then select the ringtone on the Edit Category  
screen.  
Select Camera to take a photo and  
add it to this contact entry when you  
save the photo.  
Select Photos and select an existing  
photo that you want to assign to this  
contact.  
6
Select Done.  
Assigning a caller ID photo  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign pictures to your  
contacts in Microsoft Outlook (sold  
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
separately) or Palm® Desktop software and  
you install the desktop software from the  
Palm Software Installation CD, the pictures  
are automatically added to your contact  
entries on your smartphone when you sync. If  
you use third-party synchronization software,  
picture sync may not be supported. Check  
with the software vendor for information.  
Open the contact to whom you want to  
give a caller ID photo.  
4
Select Edit.  
Setting your dialing preferences  
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix  
to your phone numbers. For example, you  
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit  
phone numbers. You can add a different  
prefix based on the length of the phone  
number.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
65  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
1
2
3
Press Phone  
Press Menu  
.
extension, you can select 4, enter your  
area code, and then enter 555 as the  
prefix. When you want to call a  
colleague, simply enter the colleagues  
4-digit extension. Your smartphone  
automatically dials the area code and  
555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can  
also create contact entries with just the  
extension number and then dial the  
number from your Contacts list.  
.
Select Options and then select Dial  
Preferences.  
4
Set any of the following options:  
Dialing from North America: Formats  
phone numbers using North American  
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).  
Always dial 1 in front of the area  
code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone  
numbers. This option is available only  
when North American Dialing is  
enabled.  
5
Select OK.  
Choosing your privacy settings  
To maintain privacy, you can choose  
whether your longitude and latitude  
position are available to the network and  
third-party applications at all times or only  
during an emergency call.  
International Prefix: Replaces the +  
sign in front of International phone  
numbers with the specified number.  
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to  
7-digit numbers. For example, enter  
your own area code to automatically add  
your area code when you dial local  
numbers.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a  
prefix to numbers with the specified  
number of digits. For example, if all the  
phone numbers in your office begin  
with 555, followed by a 4-digit  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
66  
           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
telephone if you are deaf, are hard of  
hearing, or have speech or language  
disabilities.  
Your device is compatible with select TTY  
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD  
machine to your device through the  
headset jack while this mode is enabled.  
Please check with the manufacturer of your  
TTY device for connectivity information and  
to ensure that the TTY device supports  
digital wireless transmission.  
4
Select one of the following:  
Location ON: Enables the network to  
determine your longitude and latitude  
position at any time in order to provide  
location-specific services.  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options and then select Phone  
Emergency Only: Restricts your  
location information to emergency  
services only.  
Preferences.  
4
Select the TTY/TDD pick list and select  
one of the following settings:  
5
Select OK.  
Default Mode: Sends and receives text.  
When Location ON is selected, the  
Location icon appears. When  
Emergency Only is selected, a red slash  
VCO Mode: Sends voice and receives  
text. This is also known as Voice Carry  
Over Mode.  
appears over the Location  
icon.  
HCO Mode: Sends text and receives  
voice. This is also known as Hearing  
Carry Over Mode.  
Enabling TTY  
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text  
Telephone) is a telecommunications device  
that enables you to communicate by  
Off: Sends and receives voice.  
C U S T O M I Z I N G P H O N E S E T T I N G S  
67  
                   
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
5
Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in  
the title bar of the Phone application  
whenever TTY is enabled.  
3
4
5
Select Options and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
Check the Hearing Aid Compatibility  
box.  
Turning on the HAC Setting  
Select OK.  
CAUTION Do not turn on the Hearing Aid  
Compatibility setting unless you use a  
hearing aid with a telecoil. Using this  
setting without a hearing aid or with a  
hearing aid without a telecoil may be  
harmful to your hearing.  
What are all those  
icons?  
You can monitor the status of several items  
using icons in the title bar of the Phone  
application:  
When the Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
setting is on, your smartphone sends the  
audio from your phone calls to the telecoil  
rather than to the microphone of your  
hearing aid. You are likely to hear calls  
much better because volume is increased  
and background noise and feedback are  
diminished. The HAC setting improves only  
the calls you listen to through the earpiece.  
It does not affect calls heard on the  
speakerphone or with a car kit or headset.  
HAC requires extra battery power, so watch  
your battery consumption when it's turned  
on.  
Wireless Your phone is on and you are in  
Service your wireless service providers  
Name  
coverage area. If you are outside  
a coverage area, No Service or  
Roaming appears instead.  
No Service means that there is  
no coverage at all, and Roaming  
means that another wireless  
service providers network is  
available. When you turn off your  
phone, Phone Off appears.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
68  
                       
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
You are outside your wireless  
service providers coverage area  
and are roaming on another  
wireless service providers  
network. This icon appears in  
addition to the word Roaming.  
The icon may flash if the provider  
is not on your wireless service  
providers preferred roaming list.  
Your phone is on and is  
connected to an EVDO network,  
but you are not actively  
transmitting data. You can still  
make and answer calls.  
Your phone is on and a 1xRTT  
data connection is active. You  
can still make calls, but you  
cannot answer calls (incoming  
calls go to voicemail). When you  
make a call the data transmission  
is automatically interrupted.  
Your phone is on. The bars  
display the signal strength. The  
stronger the signal, the more  
bars that appear. If you are  
outside a coverage area, no bars  
appear.  
Your phone is on and an EVDO  
data connection is active. You  
can still make or answer calls.  
When you make or answer a call,  
the data transmission is  
You are in an area that supports  
1xRTT data services.  
automatically interrupted, and  
then it resumes when you end  
the call.  
You are in an area that supports  
EVDO data services.  
Your phone is on and is  
connected to a 1xRTT network,  
but you are not actively  
transmitting data. You can still  
make and answer calls.  
You have new voicemail  
messages. You can select this  
icon to retrieve your messages.  
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
69  
                           
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
You have a new alert, such as a  
Calendar alarm or a new text  
message. To view the alert,  
This icon replaces the Bluetooth  
icon when your smartphone is  
connected to a Bluetooth  
press and hold Center  
select the icon. See Viewing and  
or  
headset or car kit. This icon  
appears in dark blue when a call  
is in progress and in light blue  
when a call is not in progress.  
TTY/TDD Mode is active. Use  
this mode to communicate by  
telephone if you are deaf or hard  
of hearing or if you have speech  
or language disabilities.  
This icon replaces the Bluetooth  
icon when a dial-up networking  
connection using Bluetooth  
wireless technology is active.  
The Location setting is on and  
your longitude and latitude  
position are available to the  
network and third-party  
applications. When you select  
the Emergency Only setting,  
this icon appears with a red slash  
and your location is available only  
during emergency calls.  
Your battery is partially drained.  
When the battery drains to 20%  
of its capacity, the icon changes  
from blue to red. At 10% of its  
capacity, you begin to receive  
warning messages, and at 5% of  
its capacity, the smartphone  
beeps (if the Ringer switch is set  
to Sound On  
) and the icon  
changes from red to clear.  
The Bluetooth® wireless  
technology icon appears in gray  
when this feature is off, in blue  
when this feature is on, and in  
reverse blue when your  
smartphone is communicating  
with another Bluetooth device.  
Your battery is charging. The  
lightning bolt turns from red to  
green when the battery is fully  
charged and your smartphone  
remains connected to the  
charger.  
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
70  
               
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
Your battery is fully charged and  
your smartphone is not  
connected to the charger.  
KEY TERM 1xRTT (Single carrier [1x] radio  
transmission technology): A wireless  
technology that can provide fast data transfer  
and Internet access with average speeds of  
60–80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps.  
You have new text messages.  
The numbers next to the icon  
indicate the number of unread  
messages in your Inbox. You can  
select this icon to retrieve your  
messages.  
KEY TERM EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized):  
A wireless broadband technology that is  
designed for very high speed data transfer  
with average download speeds of 400–  
700Kbps, and capable of reaching download  
speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and upload speeds  
of up to 156Kbps.  
Displays the current (or next)  
event from the Calendar  
application. If you have an event  
conflict during the current time  
period, a red bar appears next to  
the event description. To jump to  
the current event in the Calendar  
application, select the Calendar  
status line (see Displaying your  
calendar for details).  
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the Bluetooth icon  
to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on  
and off.  
TIP To display the remaining battery power, tap  
the battery icon at the top of the screen.  
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
71  
         
Y O U R P H O N E  
3
W H A T A R E A L L T H O S E I C O N S ?  
72  
CHAPTER  
4
Your email and other  
messages  
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for  
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo755P smartphone  
brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy  
the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and  
colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service  
provider’s data network.  
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create  
Microsoft® Word or Excel® files and send them to your  
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit  
at your convenience.  
Benefits  
Access email on the go  
Save messages from your  
computer to view at a convenient  
time  
Send and receive photos, sound  
files, Word and Excel files, and  
more  
         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must activate  
data services on your wireless service  
provider account before you can use email  
on your smartphone.  
Which application  
should I use?  
Your smartphone includes the VersaMail®  
application (called Email in Applications  
View), which you can use to access your  
corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet  
email. You can also access web-based  
email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the  
web browser on your smartphone.  
The VersaMail®  
application  
Before you can use the VersaMail  
application, you need to enter your email  
account settings. If you have multiple email  
accounts, you must enter settings for each  
email account.  
NOTE Your wireless service provider may  
offer additional email applications that are  
compatible with your Treo 755P  
smartphone. Contact your wireless service  
provider’s customer service department for  
more info.  
You can find additional information on  
using and customizing the VersaMail  
application in the User Guide for the  
VersaMail® Application at http://  
go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
TIP An email application is not an email  
provider. It works with an account from a  
provider to transfer messages to  
your smartphone.  
NOTE The instructions in this section  
apply only to the version of VersaMail that  
came with your smartphone. If you  
upgrade to a newer version of VersaMail,  
please refer to the instructions included  
with that version.  
KEY TERM Email provider The service you  
use to send and receive email. Your email  
provider’s name appears between the @  
symbol and the dot symbol in your email  
address.  
W H I C H A P P L I C A T I O N S H O U L D  
I
U S E ?  
75  
                     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
How do I get started?  
Prodigy, Speakeasy, USA.net, Verizon  
DSL, and Yahoo!  
1
If either of the following is true, see the  
User Guide for the VersaMail®  
Application:  
3
If your email providers name is not  
listed, you need to obtain the following  
info from your system administrator or  
ISP, and then skip to Setting up the  
You used the VersaMail application on  
your previous Palm OS device, and  
you want to transfer those settings to  
your smartphone.  
®
You plan to use VersaMail to access  
an email account on a Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync® server, a Lotus  
Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI  
server.  
Mail protocol: POP or IMAP  
Incoming and outgoing mail server  
names, such as mail.myisp.com  
Incoming and outgoing mail server  
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming  
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25  
(outgoing POP or IMAP)  
2
If your email provider is listed here, skip  
(If necessary) Security settings: APOP,  
ESMTP, SSL  
Canada: Rogers High Speed and  
Sympatico  
TIP The correct protocol, server, and security  
settings are required for the VersaMail  
application to be able to send and receive  
email for your account. Your email provider  
can easily provide these settings. You may be  
able to find this account setup info on your  
email provider’s website.  
Mexico: Yahoo!  
United States: AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T  
Global, AT&T Worldnet, Bell South,  
Cablevision, Charter, Comcast,  
CompuServe, Concentric, Covad, Cox  
Central, Cox East, Cox West, EarthLink,  
Gmail, *HotMail/MSN, Juno, Mail.com,  
NetZero, RCN, SBC/PacBell, SBC/  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
76  
   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Setting up the VersaMail application to  
work with common providers  
address. Check with your email provider if  
you are not sure what to enter as your  
username.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Email  
application.  
to open the VersaMail  
6
Select the Password box, enter your  
email account password, select OK, and  
then select Next.  
2
3
If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,  
select Continue.  
7
Select Next, and then select Done.  
Make up a name that describes this  
account and enter it in the Account  
Name field. For example, Work Email.  
TIP To enter settings for another email  
account, open the Accounts menu and select  
Account Setup.  
4
Select the Mail Service pick list, select  
your email provider (such as Earthlink),  
and then select Next.  
Setting up the VersaMail application to  
work with other providers  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Email  
to open the VersaMail  
application.  
2
3
If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,  
select Continue.  
Make up a name that describes this  
account and enter it in the Account  
Name field. For example, Work Email.  
5
Enter the username for your email  
account. Your username appears before  
the @ symbol in your email address.  
4
5
Select the Mail Service pick list, and  
then select Other.  
Select the Protocol pick list, select POP  
or IMAP (based on the info you got from  
NOTE For some email providers, such as  
Gmail, your username is your entire email  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
77  
                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
your system administrator or ISP), and  
settings, select Advanced, and then  
then select Next.  
enter those settings.  
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more  
options for incoming and outgoing messages.  
10 Select Done.  
Creating and sending email messages  
1
2
From the Inbox, select New.  
Begin entering one of the following for  
the addressee:  
6
Enter the username for your email  
account. Your username appears before  
the @ symbol in your email address.  
Email address  
First name  
Last name  
NOTE For some email providers, such as  
Gmail, your username is your entire email  
address. Check with your email provider if  
you are not sure what to enter as your  
username.  
TIP If you enter address info that matches one  
or more of your contacts, the VersaMail  
application displays the matching contacts. To  
accept a suggestion, select the correct  
contact. To send to a different address, keep  
entering the email address or name.  
7
8
9
Select the Password box, enter your  
email account password, select OK, and  
then select Next.  
Enter your email address and the  
names of the incoming and outgoing  
mail servers, and then select Next.  
3
Enter the subject and message text.  
TIP To move between fields, press Up or  
Down on the 5-way.  
If your system administrator or ISP  
provided port numbers or security  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
78  
           
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
4
Select one of the following:  
Adding attachments to your email  
messages  
Send: Connects and sends all  
messages immediately. If the message You can attach several types of files to your  
cannot be sent for any reason, the  
message is stored in your Outbox.  
email messages.  
.
TIP To remove an attachment, select the file in  
the Attachments box, and then select  
Delete.  
Outbox: Stores the message to be sent  
later.  
Drafts: Saves the message so you can  
continue working on it at another time.  
Attaching photos and videos  
Cancel: Returns to the message list  
without saving the message.  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the photo or video.  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
the red paper clip  
icon in the  
upper-right corner.  
3
From the Type pick list, select Photo/  
Video  
.
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application  
makes up to five attempts to send a message;  
if it is still not successful, an alert message  
appears and you must try to manually send  
the message again.  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
79  
                       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
4
On the Select Media screen, select the  
Album pick list to go to the album  
containing the photo or video you want,  
and then check the box to the left of the  
photo or video.  
Attaching Word, Excel®, PowerPoint®, and  
PDF files  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the file.  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
5
Select Done.  
the red paper clip  
icon in the  
.
upper-right corner.  
TIP To attach more than one file to a message,  
repeat steps 3 and 4.  
3
4
5
From the Type pick list, select  
Documents  
.
Select the file you want on the  
Documents screen.  
Attaching ringtones  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the ringtone.  
Select Done  
.
2
On the New Message screen, select  
Attaching other types of files  
the red paper clip  
icon in the  
1
Create the message to which you want  
to attach the item.  
upper-right corner.  
3
From the Type pick list, select Sounds.  
2
On the New Message screen, select  
the red paper clip  
upper-right corner.  
icon in the  
TIP Ringtones that are copy-protected appear  
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You  
can use these ringtones on your phone, but  
you cannot send them as attachments.  
3
From the Type pick list, select the type  
of file to attach—for example, Address  
Appointment, or Memo/Text  
,
.
4
5
Select the ringtone you want, and then  
4
5
Select the item you want from the list in  
the Type box.  
select Insert  
.
Select Done  
.
Select Done  
.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
80  
                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Receiving and viewing email messages  
TIP When viewing a message, tap the scroll  
arrows at the top of the screen to view the  
previous or next message.  
1
From any mailbox, select Get or Get &  
Send  
.
2
From the Inbox, select the message you  
want to view.  
4
Select Done.  
Viewing attachments  
There are a number of attachment types  
you can open with the built-in software  
on your smartphone (for example,  
Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint  
files; PDF files; ringtones; and photos).  
1
From any folder, open the message with  
the attachment you want to view.  
Messages with downloaded  
attachments appear with a paper clip  
icon to the left of the message icon.  
TIP If an attachment is not downloaded  
because it is larger than your maximum  
message size, the paper clip icon does not  
appear, and the attachment is not displayed at  
the bottom of the message screen. Select  
More to download and display any  
attachments.  
3
If a large incoming message is  
truncated, select More  
.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
81  
               
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
2
Tap the attachment name at the bottom  
of the message screen to view it in the  
default viewer on your smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application  
sends all messages as plain text only, with all  
HTML tags stripped, even if you are  
forwarding or replying to a message that was  
originally received as HTML.  
TIP You can also tap the folder icon to the left  
of the attachment name to open a menu of  
tasks you can do with the attachment,  
1
2
From the Inbox or another folder, open  
the message you want to respond to.  
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending  
on the attachment file type; Save to card to  
save the attachment to an expansion card; or  
select Viewer to select the application you  
want to use to view the attachment.  
In Message View, select Reply. Select  
whether to reply to just the sender or to  
reply to both the sender and all  
addressees on the message.  
3
After you finish with the attachment,  
select Done to return to the  
Attachments dialog box.  
3
4
Enter your reply.  
Select Send.  
NOTE If there is no Done button, press  
Applications and select Email  
return to the accounts Inbox.  
Managing your messages  
to  
The status icons that appear near the  
messages in your Inbox indicate the  
following:  
Replying to or forwarding email  
messages  
0
The message is unread when the  
When you respond to messages, you can  
select whether to include the original text  
subject appears in bold.  
The message includes an  
attachment.  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
82  
             
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
The message includes a meeting  
invitation.  
3
4
Select Delete on the Message menu.  
If a confirmation dialog box appears,  
select OK to confirm the deletion.  
This message has high priority.  
TIP To delete a single message, select the  
envelope icon next to the message, and then  
select Delete from the list.  
You can rearrange the message list to  
make it easier to find and view messages.  
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then  
select one of the following: Sort by  
Deleting messages by date  
You can quickly delete a group of  
messages by selecting a range of dates.  
Date Sort by Name, or Sort by Subject.  
,
To quickly switch between folders in list  
view, select the folder pick list at the top  
of the screen and select the desired  
folder.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Delete Old on the Message  
menu.  
3
Select the folder and a date range for  
the messages you want to delete.  
Deleting selected messages from the  
Inbox  
4
5
Select OK.  
When you delete a message from the  
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.  
If a confirmation dialog box appears,  
select OK to confirm the deletion.  
1
Select the bullet next to the icon of each  
message that you want to delete. To  
select adjacent messages, drag the  
stylus so that it touches the bullet to the  
left of each message. Lift the stylus and  
drag again to select more adjacent  
messages.  
TIP To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open  
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.  
Switching accounts  
If you create more than one email account  
in the VersaMail application, you need to  
switch from account to account to get,  
2
Press Menu  
.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
83  
                       
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
send, and otherwise manage the  
messages in each account.  
For complete information on all the email  
settings you can customize, see the User  
Guide for the VersaMail® Application at  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Accounts, and then select an  
account.  
Scheduling Auto Sync  
You can set up the VersaMail application to  
automatically download new email  
messages to your smartphone with the  
Auto Sync feature.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign the VersaMail  
application to a quick button, you can press  
that button repeatedly to switch between your  
different email accounts.  
TIP You need to set up a separate Auto Sync  
schedule for each email account. This feature  
may not work with email accounts that require  
a VPN connection. For additional info on using  
the VersaMail application with a VPN  
network (in this guide) and the User Guide for  
the VersaMail® Application at http://  
Customizing your email settings  
You can customize the VersaMail settings  
for each individual email account on your  
smartphone. The preferences you set apply  
only to the email account you are currently  
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,  
configure each account separately.  
Here are some examples of settings you  
can customize:  
1
2
Press Menu  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences  
.
Set a schedule to automatically retrieve  
email messages.  
.
Set preferences for how and when  
messages are retrieved.  
Add a signature to an outgoing  
message.  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
84  
                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
3
Select Auto Sync.  
TIP After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync  
and select Get Mail, from then on, only new  
messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.  
Selecting alert tones  
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given  
account, you can choose a sound—such as  
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you  
know when new email arrives.  
4
5
Check the Auto-sync box.  
1
From any mailbox screen, press  
Menu  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences  
Select Alerts  
Select the Every pick list and select the  
time interval, from 5 minutes to  
.
2
12 hours  
.
.
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,  
you may need to recharge your Treo battery  
more often.  
3
4
.
Check the Alert me of new mail box.  
TIP To receive notifications of successful Auto  
Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of  
auto sync failures box. Leave the box  
checked if you want to receive notifications of  
both successful and failed Auto Sync  
retrievals.  
6
Select the Start Time and End Time  
boxes, and then select the hour, the  
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time  
for the first and last Auto Sync to take  
place. Select OK  
.
7
8
Select the days you want the schedule  
to be active. You can choose any  
number of days, but you can set up only  
one schedule for each email account.  
5
Select the Alert Sound pick list, and  
then select a sound. Your Treo 755P  
smartphone plays a brief demo of the  
sound.  
Select OK, and then select Get Mail  
.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
85  
         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
6
Select OK  
.
according to the option you select in the  
Get pick list.  
Setting preferences for getting messages  
Unread messages (IMAP accounts  
only): Downloads only unread mail to  
your smartphone. If you don’t check this  
box and you select Get & Send, all the  
messages on your mail server are  
downloaded to your Inbox, including  
messages you’ve read.  
1
2
3
From any mailbox screen, press  
Menu  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences  
Select Incoming  
.
.
.
TIP The POP protocol does not support  
retrieval of only unread mail from the server. If  
you have a POP email account, the VersaMail  
application downloads all messages  
regardless of whether you have read them,  
and regardless of whether the Unread  
messages box is checked.  
4
Set any of the following preferences,  
and then select OK  
Mail from last: Gets messages sent  
within the number of days you specify.  
:
Get: Indicates whether to get message  
subjects only or entire messages.  
Download attachments: Automatically  
downloads files attached to email,  
except for attachments that exceed the  
maximum message size.  
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want  
to see a dialog box for selecting  
subjects only or entire messages each  
time you retrieve email. If the box is  
unchecked, messages are retrieved  
Maximum message size: Sets the  
maximum size of an incoming email  
message. Enter the size in kilobytes  
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can  
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
86  
     
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
enter any size up to 2048KB  
3
4
5
Select Signature  
.
[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],  
including attachments. The maximum  
message size that you can retrieve is  
60KB for the body text and  
Check the Attach Signature box.  
Enter your signature information, and  
then select OK  
.
approximately 5MB of total data for any  
attachments.  
Working with Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync  
Message Format: Sets the format for  
messages you retrieve.  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with  
the VersaMail application, Calendar, and  
Contacts on your smartphone to directly  
access corporate groupware information  
on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 or 2007  
server. Information in these applications is  
pushed directly from the server to your  
smartphone or wirelessly synchronizes  
directly with the server from your  
smartphone without using a desktop  
computer.  
HTML: Displays messages sent in  
HTML format with basic formatting  
intact and displays other messages as  
plain text.  
Text: Displays all messages as plain  
text, regardless of the format in which  
they were sent.  
Attaching a signature to a message  
When you create a Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail  
application, your email, calendar, and  
contact info is pushed from or syncs  
directly with the server; information does  
not sync with Microsoft Outlook® (sold  
separately) on your computer. Other  
information that is stored on your  
You can attach a personal signature, with  
info like your company’s address and  
phone numbers, to the bottom of all  
messages you send.  
1
From any mailbox screen, press  
Menu  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences  
.
2
computer, such as tasks and memos,  
.
T H E V E R S A M A I L ® A P P L I C A T I O N  
87  
                   
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
continues to synchronize with Outlook on  
your computer.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can address messages to  
multiple recipients by separating the  
For complete info on using a Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the  
User Guide for the VersaMail® Application  
at http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
addresses with a comma. If you address a  
single message to three people, you may be  
billed for three messages (depending on your  
wireless service providers service plan).  
Creating and sending a text message  
Each text message can hold up to 160  
characters. (If you send a text message to  
an email address, the email address is  
deducted from the 160-character count.)  
Messaging  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your  
phone is turned on (see Turning your phone  
on and off) and that you are in a coverage  
area.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
2
3
Select New.  
You can use the Messaging application to  
exchange brief text messages (SMS) with  
other devices and email addresses that  
support this form of messaging. Before  
you use your smartphone to send or  
receive messages, refer to your service  
plan for pricing and availability of  
Select the To field to address the  
message:  
Press Center  
name appears in the list of recent  
addresses, select it from the list.  
. If the recipients  
If the recipient is in your Contacts list,  
enter the first initial and last name (no  
spaces), and then select the  
messaging services.  
recipients phone number or email  
address, depending on where you  
want to send the message.  
M E S S A G I N G  
88  
                         
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
If the recipients name isn’t in the list  
of recent addresses or your Contacts  
list, enter the phone number or email  
address.  
TIP If you see numbers when you expect to  
see letters (or the other way around), you  
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing  
Option twice, or turn it off by pressing  
Option once.  
5
6
(Optional) Press Menu  
, and then  
select High Priority from the Compose  
menu to mark the message as urgent.  
4
Enter your message or select  
QuickText  
to insert predefined  
Select Send.  
phrases. To insert emoticons, select  
.
TIP Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the  
message without sending it. To access the  
draft, select the folder list in the title bar and  
select Drafts.  
TIP To add a new QuickText phrase, select  
Edit QuickText from the list.  
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text  
messages. The Messaging application  
automatically replaces invalid characters.  
Receiving messages  
When your phone is turned on and you are  
in a wireless coverage area, you  
automatically receive new text messages.  
You can also configure how your  
smartphone notifies you when a new  
message arrives (see Selecting Messaging  
M E S S A G I N G  
89  
                             
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
TIP When you receive a message, you can  
also press Send to call the sender.  
TIP If you have multiple alerts, the Alert  
screen displays all your pending alerts. Select  
an items description to jump to that item, or  
check the box to clear that item. To view all  
your pending alerts from any screen on your  
smartphone, press and hold Center on the  
5-way.  
The new message alert may include any of  
the following buttons:  
Using links in messages  
When you receive a text message that  
contains a telephone number, email  
address, or URL, you can dial the number,  
send an email message, or go to the web  
page immediately.  
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the  
message in your Inbox.  
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can  
reply with a text message.  
Call Back: Dials the senders phone  
number.  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
.
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you  
can view its full contents.  
Select the message that contains the  
link you want to use.  
Select the phone number, email  
address, or URL (appears as underlined  
blue text).  
Delete: Removes the message from your  
smartphone.  
Your smartphone automatically launches  
the appropriate application from the link.  
M E S S A G I N G  
90  
                 
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
Arranging your messages  
1
2
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
.
You can rearrange the messages in any  
folder by using the Sort command.  
Select the folder list in the title bar and  
select the folder that contains the  
messages you want to delete.  
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
and select  
.
3
4
5
Press Menu  
.
Select Purge from the Message menu.  
Select the Purge pick list, and then  
select older than 1 week, older than 2  
weeks, older than 1 month, or all.  
6
Select OK.  
Chatting with Messaging  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text  
messages even while you are on a phone call.  
This is easiest when using a hands-free  
headset or the speakerphone.  
2
Select the folder list in the title bar and  
select the folder you want to sort.  
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select View, and then select Sort by  
Name or Sort by Date.  
When you exchange more than one  
message with a single contact, the  
messages you exchange with that person  
are grouped into a chat session. When you  
select a chat session from your message  
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all  
messages you’ve exchanged with this  
contact, and the lower part provides an  
entry area.  
Deleting messages  
You can delete several messages at once  
from any folder by using the Purge  
command.  
M E S S A G I N G  
91  
                           
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
You can carry on multiple chats at the same Customizing your Messaging settings  
time and easily switch between them,  
using the pick list at the top of the screen.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
1
Press Applications  
Messaging  
Do one of the following:  
and select  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
.
From the Options menu, select  
Preferences.  
2
Start a new chat: Select a message  
and reply to it.  
4
On the Messages tab, set any of the  
following preferences for your individual  
messages:  
Continue an existing chat: Select a  
message with the chat  
icon.  
Confirm message deletions: Indicate  
whether you want deletion confirmation  
prompts to appear.  
3
4
Enter your message.  
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate  
whether you want the body text to  
appear in the alert when you receive a  
new message, or if you want the alert  
to hide the text and prompt you to go to  
the message.  
TIP Pale gray text indicates that a message is  
pending or enroute.  
Select Send.  
M E S S A G I N G  
92  
                             
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
5
Select the Chat tab and set any of the  
following preferences for chat sessions.  
in the selected label color, or only your  
name.  
6
Select OK.  
Selecting Messaging alert tones  
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a  
silent alert that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
Messaging  
.
Create chats from messages: Indicate  
when you want to group messages  
from the same person into a chat.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Alerts.  
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate  
whether you want to see the local date  
and time the message was sent next to  
each message.  
Display my name in chat window as:  
Enter the name you want to use as the  
label for your messages in Chat View.  
Label color: Select a color to  
differentiate your messages from the  
senders messages while in Chat View.  
4
5
Select the Application pick list and  
select Messaging.  
Use color for: Indicate whether you  
want both your name and message text  
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
M E S S A G I N G  
93  
                           
Y O U R E M A I L A N D O T H E R M E S S A G E S  
4
6
7
8
Select the Vibrate pick list and select  
how you want your smartphone to  
vibrate upon an incoming message.  
The following icons show the message  
type and additional status info:  
A text message  
A chat session  
A voicemail page  
Select the Message Tone pick list and  
select a tone for incoming message  
alerts.  
Check the boxes if you want to see  
onscreen alerts when a new message  
arrives and when a message you sent is  
received.  
An incoming message with an error  
A message that is waiting to be sent  
9
Select Done.  
A message that was successfully  
sent  
What are all those icons?  
TIP By default, the Messaging app shows the  
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select  
the folder list in the title bar and select a  
different folder from the list.  
A message that was sent to multiple  
recipients, and only some of the  
recipients received the message  
An outgoing message with an error  
The message descriptions in the Inbox,  
Outbox, and Sent folders show the  
message status:  
DID YOU KNOW? If you are outside a coverage  
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing  
messages go into the Outbox. When you  
return to a coverage area or turn your phone  
back on, your pending messages are sent  
automatically and transferred to the Sent  
folder.  
Unread messages appear in bold.  
Read messages appear in plain text.  
Urgent messages appear with a red  
exclamation point (!).  
M E S S A G I N G  
94  
                               
CHAPTER  
5
Your connections to the web  
and wireless devices  
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,  
news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service  
provider’s network and the built-in web browser, you can take  
the web with you almost anywhere.  
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo755P  
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a  
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of  
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to  
share contacts or your favorite photos with other people.  
Benefits  
Carry the web with you  
Connect to Bluetooth devices  
Store web pages for offline  
viewing  
           
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
pages into a single column and resizes  
images on your screen. This way, you can  
see most content without scrolling left or  
right.  
Web browser  
The Blazer® web browser on your  
smartphone provides quick and easy  
access to web pages. You can view most  
sites you use on your computer, including  
those with security and advanced features,  
such as JavaScript and frames. To browse  
the web, you must activate data services  
from your wireless service provider.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send email from a web  
page on your smartphone. Email addresses  
appear as links on web pages. After you  
configure an email application on your  
smartphone, you can select an email address  
link to create a message to the selected  
address.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can visit secure websites.  
The security certificates and 128-bit Secure  
Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you  
browse secure sites, such as online shopping,  
banking, and email. Remember: Some secure  
sites also require specific browsers and may  
not work with the web browser application.  
DID YOU KNOW? The web browser supports  
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and  
cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such  
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.  
1
2
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
you are in a coverage area.  
Viewing a web page  
The web browser uses patent-pending  
technology to optimize web pages for your  
smartphone. By default, the browser is in  
Optimized Mode, which reformats web  
Press Applications  
Web  
and select  
.
W E B B R O W S E R  
97  
                                               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
NOTE Trouble connecting to the Internet?  
Internet for troubleshooting tips.  
page. In Wide Page mode, use the  
stylus to select a link.  
Submit a form: Enter the info and then  
select the onscreen button to submit  
the form. If the form doesn’t have an  
3
Enter a web page address (URL) in the  
Address Bar and select Go.  
onscreen button, press Return  
.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web  
page, a lock  
Address Bar.  
icon appears in the  
TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options  
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the  
screen, select Small. To make the text easier  
to read, select Large.  
4
Do any of the following to navigate  
within the web page:  
5
Use the 5-way  
the following icons in the title bar:  
to access any of  
View a page in wide layout format (as  
on your computer): Press Menu  
,
select Options, and then select Wide  
Page Mode.  
Goes to the previous web page.  
Goes to the next web page.  
Scroll through the page: In Optimized  
Mode (the default format, which is  
optimized for your smartphone screen),  
Refreshes the page with the  
latest content from the Internet.  
press Up  
or Down . In Wide Page  
Mode, press Up , Down , Left  
,
Opens a list where you can  
or Right to scroll in all directions.  
select Fast Mode (no images or  
style sheets) or Normal Mode  
(with images and style sheets).  
Follow a link to another web page: In  
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by  
pressing Left or Right , and then  
press Center  
to go to the selected  
W E B B R O W S E R  
98  
                                       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Opens a dialog box where you  
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing  
you to open your favorite web pages  
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different  
buttons).  
can enter a web address you  
want to go to or view a list of  
recently viewed web pages.  
Goes to your home page.  
Displays a list of your  
bookmarks and saved pages.  
DID YOU KNOW? The predefined bookmarks  
take you to pages that are optimized for your  
smartphone.  
1
2
3
Go to the page you want to bookmark.  
Press Menu  
TIP To find a recent page or search, select the  
Address Bar pick list and select the item from  
the list.  
.
Select Add Bookmark from the Page  
menu.  
TIP Want to get to the icons faster? Press  
Space to jump to the Address Bar, and then  
press Up on the 5-way to scroll to the icons.  
You can also press Menu to access the same  
commands from the menus.  
4
5
(Optional) Change the entries in the  
Name and Description fields.  
Select OK, and then select OK again.  
TIP You can customize the Fast Mode  
settings for details.  
TIP Tap and hold the Back or Forward buttons  
or select these buttons with the 5-way to pop  
up a list of sites you’ve visited.  
Creating a bookmark  
With bookmarks you can instantly access a  
web page without entering the address  
every time. The web browser can store up  
W E B B R O W S E R  
99  
                                 
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Saving a page  
You can use the web browser to save a  
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need  
a wireless connection to view it later.  
1
2
3
4
Go to the page you want to save.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Save Page from the Page menu.  
Select OK, and then select OK again.  
TIP To go back to the last web page you  
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select  
Page View.  
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages  
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in  
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are  
indicated by a small triangle in the  
upper-right corner of the bookmark.  
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved  
page  
1
2
3
From Bookmarks View, press  
Menu  
.
DID YOU KNOW? You can make Bookmarks View  
the default view when you open the browser.  
Open the Options menu and select  
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list  
and select Bookmarks.  
Select Edit Bookmarks on the  
Bookmarks menu.  
Select the bookmark you want to edit or  
delete.  
1
2
Select the Bookmarks View  
icon.  
Select the bookmark or saved page you  
want to view.  
W E B B R O W S E R  
100  
                       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
TIP Your wireless service provider may preset  
bookmarks on your smartphone that are  
customized for their services. You may not be  
able to customize some of the preset  
bookmarks. If you can’t edit, delete, or beam  
a bookmark, it is probably locked and these  
actions are prohibited.  
4
5
Enter the desired changes.  
3
4
Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.  
Select OK.  
Use the stylus to drag and drop a  
bookmark into the desired slot. You can  
move a bookmark within the current  
page or move it to a different bookmark  
page by dragging and dropping it on the  
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages  
Bookmarks View includes ten pages for  
bookmarks so that you can arrange  
bookmarks and saved pages in a logical  
fashion. For example, you can store travel  
links on one bookmark page, stock links on  
another, and business links on a third page.  
Bookmark Page  
icon.  
5
Select OK.  
Downloading files from a web page  
1
From Bookmarks View, press  
Menu  
The web browser lets you download files  
that are recognized by one of the  
.
2
Select Edit Bookmarks from the  
Bookmarks menu.  
applications on your smartphone. When  
you download a file, you can open it in the  
application that recognizes the file. For  
example, download an MP3 file so you can  
listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™  
application. If a file is not recognized by any  
of the applications on your smartphone,  
W E B B R O W S E R  
101  
                             
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
you can download the file to an expansion  
card, but you cannot open it on your  
smartphone.  
4
Select Ye s .  
TIP You can also save an image from a web  
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.  
You can download files such as new  
applications, and choose to play or save  
music and video files in many popular  
formats—provided that the website  
permits the downloading of files:  
Streaming files from a web page  
The web browser lets you stream files that  
are recognized by one of the applications  
on your smartphone. For example, you can  
choose to play music and video files in  
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).  
Item  
Supported File Types  
JPEG, WBMP, GIF  
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV  
MIDI, AAC  
Pictures  
Videos  
Ringtones  
Music  
1
When the web browser recognizes  
streamed content on a web page, it  
displays a Play  
listen to the streamed content, select  
Play  
icon. To view or  
MP3, WMA  
.
TIP You can also access software and other  
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.  
TIP The web browser recognizes streamed  
content that is not supported by any of the  
applications on your smartphone, and it  
displays a Media type not supported  
message.  
1
2
Go to the page with the link to the file  
you want to download.  
Press Left or Right to highlight the  
link to the file, and then press Center  
2
Once streaming begins, playback starts  
automatically. Use the following  
.
controls when viewing or listening:  
3
If prompted, select what you want to do  
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or  
Save To Card.  
Select  
to return to the web page  
containing the streamed content.  
W E B B R O W S E R  
102  
                               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Select  
pause playback.  
or press Center  
to  
to  
6
Select Edit, and then select Paste.  
Select  
resume playback after pausing.  
or press Center  
DID YOU KNOW? If the web browser does not  
recognize a phone number as dialable, you  
can copy the phone number (as text) and  
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a  
A few seconds after playback begins,  
the toolbar is hidden and you can view  
the content on the full screen. Press  
Up  
or Down  
to display the  
or Down  
Returning to recently viewed pages  
toolbar; press Up  
The History list stores the addresses of the  
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the  
History list are sorted chronologically.  
again to hide the toolbar again.  
Press the Volume button on the side  
of your smartphone to adjust the  
volume.  
1
2
3
From Page View, press Menu  
.
Select History from the Page menu.  
Copying text from a web page  
Press Down to navigate through the  
list.  
You can copy text from a web page and  
paste it into other applications.  
4
Select the web page you want to load.  
1
Use the stylus to highlight the text you  
want to copy.  
Finding text on a web page  
1
2
From Page View, press Menu  
.
2
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Find Text on Page from the  
Select Edit, and then select Copy.  
Page menu.  
Go to the app in which you want to  
paste the text, and use the stylus or  
3
4
Enter the text you want to find.  
Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box  
5-way  
where you want to paste the text.  
Press Menu  
to position the cursor  
to indicate whether you want the search  
5
.
W E B B R O W S E R  
103  
                                   
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
to wrap from the end of the page to the  
beginning when the end is reached.  
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the  
web address appears in Page View.  
When it is visible, you can select the  
pick list to go to a previously viewed  
page or enter a URL directly from Page  
View.  
5
Select Find to start the search.  
Customizing your web browser settings  
1
2
From Page View, press Menu  
.
4
Select General and set any of the  
following preferences:  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
3
Select Page and set any of the following  
preferences:  
Start With: Determines which view  
appears when you open the browser.  
Auto-complete: Determines whether  
the web browser suggests text, based  
on your previous entries, when you  
begin entering info.  
Disable cookies: Determines whether  
websites can store personalized info on  
your Treo smartphone. Some sites do  
not work properly if you select this  
option.  
Home Page: Sets the page that appears  
when you select  
.
Restore Default: Selects the original  
home page, if you changed it.  
W E B B R O W S E R  
104  
                               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses  
can still see any image by tapping and  
JavaScript elements on the web pages  
you view.  
holding its placeholder box.  
5
Select Advanced and set any of the  
Tap and Drag: Determines whether  
dragging the stylus selects text or  
scrolls through the content of the page.  
following preferences:  
Set memory limit for storing pages:  
Sets the memory available for your  
cache. Pages are cached so that they  
load faster the next time you view  
them.  
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines  
whether selected items are hidden so  
that web pages load faster. When you  
select Fast Mode, you can set the next  
two options.  
Disable cascading style sheets:  
Determines whether style sheets are  
applied when you load a web page.  
When style sheets are disabled, pages  
download faster, but you may lose  
some of the formatting.  
Cookies: Indicates how much memory  
is being used by cookies. To free up this  
memory, select Clear Cookies.  
KEY TERM Cascading style sheets  
A
method used to describe the presentation of  
a web page or document written in a markup  
language, such as HTML or XML.  
Cache: Indicates how much memory is  
being used by your cache to store  
recent pages and history. To free up this  
memory, select Clear Cache.  
Don’t download images! Determines  
whether images appear when you load  
a web page. If you select not to view  
images, then web pages load faster. You  
W E B B R O W S E R  
105  
                                   
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Clear cache on exit: Determines  
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices  
whether the cache clears each time you that you trust to communicate with your  
exit the web browser.  
Treo smartphone. When communicating  
with trusted devices, your Treo smartphone  
skips the discovery process and creates a  
secure link as long as the device is within  
range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet/10  
meters, depending on environmental  
conditions, including obstacles, radio  
interference from nearby electronic  
equipment, and other factors.  
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to  
access the Internet. If your connection  
requires a proxy server, please contact  
your Internet service provider or IT  
administrator for this information.  
6
Select OK.  
When you configure a headset as  
hands-free device, the headset is  
automatically added to your trusted device  
list. Follow the steps in this section to add  
other devices to your trusted device list,  
such as a friend’s handheld.  
Connections with  
Bluetooth® devices  
With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can connect to a  
number of Bluetooth devices, such as a  
headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as  
well as to other smartphones and  
handhelds that are equipped with  
Bluetooth wireless technology. If your  
computer is enabled with Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can also  
synchronize wirelessly.  
Requesting a connection with another  
Bluetooth device  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
.
2
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
106  
                         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
6
Select Add Device. The discovery icon  
appears, indicating that the discovery  
process is active.  
7
8
Select the Show pick list and select  
Nearby devices.  
If the device you want to add doesn’t  
appear on the discovery results list,  
make sure that the other device is ready  
to receive a connection request (see the  
device’s documentation), and then  
select Find More on your smartphone  
to search again.  
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that  
identifies your smartphone when it is  
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
9
Enter the same passkey on your  
smartphone and on the Bluetooth  
device, and select OK.  
NOTE Use the same device name for all  
your Bluetooth connections. If you change  
the device name, you need to re-create any  
partnerships you have already created.  
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices  
have a predefined passkey; if your device  
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in  
the documentation for that device. Other  
devices provide a screen where you enter  
a passkey that you make up. In either case,  
you must use the same passkey on both  
your smartphone and the other Bluetooth  
device. We recommend that where  
4
5
Select Setup Devices.  
Select Trusted Devices.  
possible, you make up a passkey of 16  
alphanumeric characters (letters and  
numerals only) to improve the security of  
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,  
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
107  
               
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be NOTE Use the same device name for all  
deciphered.  
your Bluetooth connections. If you change  
the device name, you need to re-create any  
partnerships you have already created.  
10 Select Done.  
Accepting a connection from another  
Bluetooth device  
4
Select the Visibility pick list and select  
one of the following:  
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that  
are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your  
smartphone. Your smartphone remains  
accessible to other devices until you  
turn this option off. After you’ve finished  
using this setting, remember to change  
it back to Hidden.  
TIP For the smartphone to be visible to  
Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must  
be set to On and visibility must be set to  
Visible or Temporary.  
1
2
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
.
TIP Use the Visible option only when you need  
your smartphone to be accessible for an  
extended period of time. For short-term  
accessibility, use the Temporary option.  
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices  
that are not on your Trusted Device list  
to request a connection with your  
smartphone during the next two  
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to  
the Hidden setting and becomes  
inaccessible to other devices after two  
minutes.  
3
(Optional) Enter a device name that  
identifies your smartphone when it is  
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.  
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
108  
         
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
Hidden: Allows only devices with which you must use the same passkey on both  
you have previously formed a  
your smartphone and the other Bluetooth  
device. We recommend that where  
possible, you make up a passkey of 16  
alphanumeric characters (letters and  
numerals only) to improve the security of  
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,  
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be  
deciphered.  
partnership to request a connection  
with your smartphone. New devices  
cannot request a connection.  
5
Enter the same passkey on your  
smartphone and on the Bluetooth  
device.  
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,  
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have  
a predefined passkey; if your device has a  
predefined passkey, you can find it in the  
documentation for that device. Other  
6
(Optional) Check the Add to trusted  
device list box if you want to form a  
partnership with the requesting device.  
7
Select OK.  
devices provide a screen where you enter  
a passkey that you make up. In either case,  
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
109  
       
Y O U R C O N N E C T I O N S T O T H E W E B A N D W I R E L E S S D E V I C E S  
5
C O N N E C T I O N S W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® D E V I C E S  
110  
CHAPTER  
6
Your photos, videos, and  
music  
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,  
and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your  
MP3 player and your phone?  
Your Palm® Treo755P smartphone solves both problems. You can  
keep your favorite photos—videos, too—right on your  
smartphone. And there’s no need to carry an expensive MP3  
player; you can play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer  
songs onto your smartphone or an expansion card (sold  
separately) and then listen through your stereo headphones.  
Benefits  
Never be far from your favorite  
people, places, and songs  
No separate photo viewer, MP3,  
CD, or mini-disc player required  
Organize your photos, videos, and  
songs  
       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
location is based on the location of the  
album (smartphone or expansion card).  
Camera and  
Camcorder  
Your smartphone comes with an  
easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera  
with 2x digital zoom. You can use the  
camera to take and view pictures and  
videos and send them to your friends and  
family. To add a personal touch to your  
smartphone, use your pictures as your  
wallpaper in the Phone applications Main  
View, and as caller ID images.  
New Albums: Opens a dialog box where  
you can enter an album name and  
select the storage location (smartphone  
or expansion card).  
Taking a picture  
You can store pictures on your smartphone  
or on an expansion card.  
TIP The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel  
(1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also  
supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x  
240) resolution. To view these settings before  
you take a picture, press Menu.  
1
Press Applications  
Camera  
and select  
.
2
By default, the Camera application  
stores pictures you take in the Palm  
folder on your smartphone. To store a  
picture in a different location, select one  
of the following from the pick list:  
3
4
Find your subject in the screen on your  
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of  
your smartphone.)  
<Album name>: Stores the picture in  
the selected album. The storage  
(Optional) To get a close-up of your  
subject, press Up  
Down  
to select 2x. Press  
to return to 1x.  
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R  
113  
                           
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
5
6
Press Center  
to capture the picture.  
TIP To add an audio caption later, open the  
picture and then select Audio Caption from  
the Photo menu.  
Do any of the following:  
DID YOU KNOW? You can personalize a picture.  
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and  
then use the drawing tools to add your own  
personal touch. When you save the picture,  
you can replace the original or save a copy.  
Recording a video  
You can store videos on your smartphone  
or on an expansion card.  
Saves the picture in the location  
you selected in step 2.  
1
Press Applications  
Camcorder  
and select  
.
Deletes the picture.  
TIP The video recording screen displays the  
approximate recording time you have left  
based on the space available on your  
smartphone or expansion card. Actual  
recording time may vary depending on how  
fast you are moving, how many colors you are  
recording, and so on.  
Opens a dialog box where you  
can choose to attach the picture  
to an email message or send it to  
another device that uses  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Lets you add a voice caption.  
2
By default, the Camcorder application  
stores videos you record in the Palm  
folder on your smartphone. To store a  
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R  
114  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
video in a different location, select one  
of the following:  
4
5
Press Center  
to start recording.  
After you finish recording, press  
<Album name>: Stores the video in the  
selected album. The storage location is  
based on the location of the album  
(smartphone or expansion card).  
Center  
again to stop.  
6
Select any of the following:  
Plays the video, so you can  
review it.  
New Albums: Opens a dialog box where  
you can enter an album name and  
select the storage location (smartphone  
or expansion card).  
Saves the video in the location  
you selected in step 2.  
Deletes the video.  
Opens a dialog box where you  
can choose to attach the video to  
an email message or send it to  
another Bluetooth device.  
TIP The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288)  
resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144)  
resolution. To view these settings before you  
capture a video, press Menu.  
Opens a dialog box where you  
can adjust the volume during  
playback.  
3
Find your subject in the screen on your  
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of  
your smartphone.)  
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R  
115  
                         
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the  
microphone on and off so that you can  
record videos with or without sound.  
TIP During playback, tap and drag the  
progress indicator bar to jump to a different  
section of the video. Select Pause to pause  
video playback.  
Resolution: Sets the default size for  
newly captured pictures or videos.  
Customizing your Camera settings  
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines  
whether the date the picture is taken  
appears on your pictures.  
You can customize the built-in camera’s  
settings for your Treo 755P smartphone.  
1
2
Go to Camera View or Camcorder View.  
Press Menu . If you are in Camera  
View, the Photo Settings screen  
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,  
the Video Settings screen appears.  
Review photos/videos: Determines  
whether you can review pictures or  
videos before saving them and how  
quickly they are automatically saved.  
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a  
series of pictures or videos to be  
captured, such as Seattle001,  
Seattle002, and so on.  
3
Set any of the following preferences:  
Effects: Sets the color palette for the  
current picture or video. You cannot  
change an item’s palette after you take  
the picture or video.  
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the  
sound that plays before you take  
the picture.  
Shutter sound: Determines whether a  
sound plays when you take a picture or  
video.  
C A M E R A A N D C A M C O R D E R  
116  
                                               
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
1
2
Press Applications  
Pics&Videos  
and select  
.
Select the album that contains the  
picture you want to see.  
TIP To view an album from an expansion card,  
insert the card and select the album from the  
Album list. If the items on the card are not  
grouped into albums, select the card name  
from the list.  
4
Select Done.  
3
4
Select the picture you want to view.  
Press Right or Left to scroll to the  
next item in the album.  
Pics & Videos  
Viewing a picture  
DID YOU KNOW? To see the outer edges of a  
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus  
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.  
In addition to viewing the pictures you  
capture with the built-in camera, you can  
view pictures captured on many popular  
digital cameras or downloaded from the  
Internet. Your smartphone supports the  
following picture formats:  
5
6
If the picture has a voice caption, select  
to hear it.  
Tap the picture or press Center  
to  
return to Thumbnail View.  
JPG  
TIF  
TIP In Thumbnail View, you can group photos  
or videos to more easily locate them. Select  
one of the grouping options from the View  
menu.  
BMP  
GIF  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
117  
                                       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Viewing a video  
5
Press Center  
to return to  
Thumbnail View.  
In addition to viewing the videos you  
capture with the built-in camera, you can  
view videos captured on many popular  
digital cameras. Your smartphone supports  
the following types of video files:  
DID YOU KNOW? If you pause video playback  
and then close the video, the video starts  
where you left off the next time you play it.  
3GP  
Viewing a slide show  
3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio +  
.3g2 file type)  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Pics&Videos  
and select  
.
MP4  
MPG  
M4V  
Highlight (or open) the album you want  
to view.  
(Optional) Press Menu  
, select  
Options, and then select Auto-hide  
Toolbar Off if you want to see the  
toolbar.  
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and  
IMA-ADPCM audio)  
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)  
4
5
Press Space  
show.  
to start the slide  
1
Press Applications  
Pics&Videos  
and select  
.
Press Center  
to return to the  
previous view.  
2
3
4
Select the album that contains the video  
you want to see.  
Select the video you want to view.  
Playback begins automatically.  
Hold down Right or Left to seek  
within the current video, or press Right  
or Left to scroll to the next item in  
the album.  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
118  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
TIP To set slide show options such as  
background music and transitions, open the  
Options menu and select Slideshow  
DID YOU KNOW? You cannot send copyrighted  
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon  
in Thumbnail View or Picture list.  
Setting. Keep in mind that background music  
overrides audio captions when you’re running  
a slide show. Background music for a slide  
show also overrides any music that might be  
playing using the Pocket Tunes application on  
your smartphone if you start a slide show.  
4
Select Send.  
Sending pictures or videos  
You can attach pictures or videos to email  
messages or send them to another  
Bluetooth device.  
1
From the Album list, select the album  
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)  
you want to send.  
5
6
7
Select the method you want to use to  
send the pictures or videos.  
(Optional) Enter any text you want to  
add to the message.  
2
3
Tap  
in the lower-right corner of the  
screen.  
Address and send the message.  
Select the pictures or videos to send, or  
select Select All to send the entire  
album.  
Copying a picture or video  
You can copy pictures or videos into  
another album. You can also copy pictures  
and videos between your smartphone and  
an expansion card.  
NOTE A + sign appears next to selected  
items.  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
119  
                               
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
1
From the Album list, select the album  
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)  
you want to copy.  
8
Select Copy.  
TIP You can also move pictures and videos  
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)  
menu and select Move to. The remaining  
steps are the same as copying pictures, but  
use the Move commands instead of the Copy  
commands.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Copy to from the Photo (or  
Video) menu.  
4
Select the pictures or videos to copy, or  
select Select All to copy the entire  
album. (A + sign appears next to  
selected items.)  
Organizing pictures and videos  
1
2
3
Open the album you want to organize.  
Press Menu  
5
6
Select Copy.  
.
Select the Copy items to pick list and  
select whether to copy the selected  
items to your device or to an expansion  
card.  
Select Album, and then select Add to  
album or Remove from album.  
4
5
Select the pictures or videos you want  
to add or remove, or select Select All to  
add or remove the entire album. (A +  
sign indicates that you want to add the  
item. An X sign indicates that you want  
to remove the item.)  
A + sign  
indicates that  
a picture is  
selected  
Select Add or Remove.  
7
Select the Into album pick list and  
select the album you want to copy the  
selected items to.  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
120  
                                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Adding a picture to a contact entry  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also open the Album  
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by  
selecting the icon in the lower-right corner.  
1
Open the picture you want to add to a  
contact.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily  
browse and manage files on an expansion  
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,  
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.  
Select Options, and then select Save  
as Contact.  
4
Select the contact you want to add this  
picture to.  
TIP To change the name, add a caption, or  
view other picture or video information,  
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo  
(or Video) menu, and select Details.  
Rotating a picture  
1
2
3
4
Open the picture you want to rotate.  
Press Menu  
.
Saving a picture as wallpaper  
Select Rotate from the Photo menu.  
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper  
for the Phone applications Main View.  
Select the orientation.  
1
Open the picture you want to save as  
wallpaper.  
Deleting a picture or video  
1
Open the album that contains the  
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.  
2
3
Press Menu  
Select Options, and then select Save  
as Wallpaper  
.
2
3
Press Menu  
.
.
Select Delete from the Photo (or  
Video) menu.  
4
When the confirmation message  
appears, confirm by selecting Yes or  
decline by selecting No.  
4
Select the pictures or videos that you  
want to delete, or select Select All to  
delete the entire album. (An X sign  
appears next to selected items.)  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
121  
                                           
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
5
6
Select Delete.  
If you want to manage photos and videos  
directly from the location in which they’re  
stored, you can find your pictures and  
videos in the following locations:  
Select Delete to confirm the deletion.  
TIP You can also highlight a picture or video in  
Thumbnail View and then press Backspace to  
delete the highlighted item.  
Windows:  
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm  
Photos\ <user name>\Internal  
Viewing pictures and videos on your  
computer  
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm  
Photos\ <user name>\Expansion Card  
When you synchronize your Treo 755P  
smartphone, your pictures and videos are  
copied to your desktop computer. You can  
view pictures in JPEG format and videos in  
MPEG-4 format (3G2 file extension). You  
can email them to friends using your  
desktop email application.  
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm  
Videos\ <user name>\Internal  
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm  
Videos\<user name>\Expansion Card  
Mac:  
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device  
name> : Internal  
You can view and edit synchronized  
pictures and videos in the Palm Media  
desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop  
software and click the Media icon. For  
information about using the Palm Media  
desktop application, refer to the  
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device  
name> : Expansion Card  
Palm Desktop Online Help.  
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device  
name> : Internal  
P I C S  
&
V I D E O S  
122  
                       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :  
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device  
name> : Expansion Card  
them using the Pocket Tunes application  
on your smartphone.  
TIP You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version  
that supports more music file formats (such  
as WMA), supports subscription music, and  
includes additional features. For more info,  
Pocket Tunes  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Mac You need an  
expansion card (sold separately) to listen to  
music on your smartphone. You cannot  
transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly  
onto your smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? If a call comes in when you’re  
listening to music, you can take the call and  
the music pauses automatically. After you  
finish the call, the music starts again.  
Setting up Windows Media Player for  
MP3  
You can listen to music through the  
speaker on the back of your smartphone or  
through the stereo headset included with  
your smartphone. (If you want to use  
stereo headphones with a 3.5mm  
On a Windows computer, you need to set  
Windows Media Player to save your music  
files in MP3 format in order for the files to  
be compatible with Pocket Tunes.  
connector, then a 2.5mm stereo adapter is  
required, sold separately). To listen to  
music on your smartphone, you need to  
convert the music files into MP3 format  
using Windows Media Player (Windows  
computers) or iTunes (Mac computers) and  
then transfer the music files to your  
smartphone or an expansion card. After  
you transfer the music files, you can play  
1
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the sync cable.  
2
On your smartphone, press  
Applications  
pTunes  
and select  
.
3
On your computer, open Windows  
Media Player, and then click the  
full-screen icon in the upper-right corner  
to maximize the window.  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
123  
                               
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
4
5
Click Tools, and then click Options.  
Click the Rip Music tab, click the  
Format pick list, and then select mp3.  
Click OK.  
Uncheck  
box  
6
7
Click Tools, and then click Options.  
Click the Devices tab, select Palm  
Handheld from the Devices list, and  
then click Properties.  
9
Click OK, and then click OK again.  
You now have set up Windows Media  
Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket  
Tunes application on your smartphone.  
Select your  
smartphone  
Click  
Properties  
Setting up iTunes for MP3  
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X)  
to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.  
For more information on using the iTunes  
software, see the documentation that  
came with your Mac.  
8
Click the Quality tab, uncheck the  
Convert files as required by this  
handheld (recommended) box, and  
click Apply.  
1
2
3
On your Mac, open iTunes.  
Select Preferences.  
Click the Advanced button at the top of  
the window, and then click Importing.  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
124  
   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
4
5
Click the Import Using pop-up menu  
and select MP3 Encoder.  
1
2
Connect your smartphone to your  
computer with the USB sync cable.  
(Optional) Click the Setting pop-up  
On your smartphone, press  
menu and select Good Quality.  
Applications  
pTunes  
and select  
.
TIP Mac If you want greater control over the  
file size and sound quality of your MP3 files,  
select Custom from the Setting pop-up  
menu.  
3
4
If you are transferring MP3 files from a  
Mac, insert an expansion card into your  
smartphone. This step is optional for  
Windows users.  
Do one of the following:  
Transferring MP3 files from your computer  
The Pocket Tunes software that comes  
with your smartphone is compatible with  
the popular MP3 audio file format. If your  
MP3 files are already on your computer’s  
hard drive, you need to transfer them to  
your smartphone to listen to them on your  
smartphone.  
WINDOWS ONLY Open Windows  
Media Player on your computer. Select  
the Sync tab, and then select Palm  
Handheld from the drop-down list.  
Select Start Sync. The files are  
transferred to your smartphone.  
If an expansion card is inserted into the  
smartphone, Windows Media Player  
copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.  
If you don’t have an expansion card  
inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your  
smartphones memory.  
NOTE Do not press the sync button on  
your cable. Windows Media Player  
transfers the files, so theres no need to  
do anything.  
IMPORTANT You must synchronize your  
smartphone with your computer at least  
once before you can transfer MP3 files  
from your computer.  
MAC ONLY Drag and drop the MP3  
files onto the Send To Handheld  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
125  
                       
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
droplet in the Palm folder. Select your  
device name, the file name, and the  
destination (card). Click OK. Synchronize  
your smartphone with your computer.  
Be patient; transferring music to an  
expansion card can take several  
minutes.  
3
4
Select the Rip tab.  
Select the tracks you want to convert to  
MP3.  
5
6
Select Rip Music.  
Transfer the MP3 files to your  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also use a card reader  
accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3  
files from your computer to your expansion  
card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root  
directory of the card, and store your MP3 files  
in this folder.  
MAC ONLY  
1
2
On your Mac, open iTunes.  
Insert the music CD into the CD drive  
on your Mac.  
3
4
5
Check the boxes next to the tracks you  
want to convert to MP3.  
Transferring music from a CD to your  
smartphone  
Click the Import button in the  
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.  
If your songs are on a CD and you want to  
listen to them on your smartphone, you  
need to convert them to MP3 format on  
your computer before you transfer the files  
to your smartphone.  
When the songs have finished  
importing, click the Eject Disk button in  
the lower-right corner of the iTunes  
window.  
6
Transfer the MP3 files to your  
WINDOWS ONLY  
1
2
On your computer, open Windows  
Media Player.  
Insert the music CD into your  
computers CD drive.  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
126  
                 
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Listening to music on your Treo  
smartphone  
To adjust the volume during playback,  
press the Volume button on the side  
of your smartphone.  
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening  
to this device at full volume for a long  
period of time can damage your hearing.  
To pause playback, select Pause  
.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also press Space to  
pause and resume playback, as well as use  
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause  
and resume playback.  
1
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to  
for more information.  
2
Press Applications  
and select  
pTunes  
.
Progress  
indicator  
TIP You can change the settings on your  
smartphone so that pressing and holding the  
Side button opens Pocket Tunes. See  
Reassigning buttons for details.  
Play/Pause  
Choose  
Song  
Previous  
song  
3
Do any of the following:  
Next song  
Volume  
To play or resume playback of the  
current song, select Play  
To play the next song, select Next  
Song  
To play the previous song, select  
Previous Song  
To play a different song, select  
.
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it  
reaches the end of your list or until you  
.
select Pause  
. Music continues to play  
even if you switch to another application or  
turn off your screen. If you want to stop  
playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes,  
.
press Menu  
, select Background Prefs  
Choose Song  
and select a  
from the Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable  
background play box, and then select OK.  
song from the list.  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
127  
                                   
Y O U R P H O T O S , V I D E O S , A N D M U S I C  
6
Creating a playlist  
Editing a playlist  
If you want to play a group of songs in a  
particular order, you can create a playlist.  
1
Press Applications  
pTunes  
Press Menu  
and select  
.
2
3
.
1
Press Applications  
pTunes  
Press Menu  
and select  
.
Select Actions, and then select  
Manage Playlists.  
2
3
.
4
5
Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.  
Select Actions, and then select  
Manage Playlists.  
Do any of the following:  
4
5
Select New, and then enter a name for  
the playlist.  
To delete a song from the playlist,  
select the song and then select  
Remove.  
Select Add Song. Select the songs you  
want to include on the playlist.  
To add a song, select Add Song,  
check a song’s box, and then  
select Done.  
To move a song up or down one slot,  
select a song and then select Up or  
Down.  
6
Select Save List.  
TIP To delete a playlist, select Manage  
Playlists from the Actions menu, select the  
playlist, and then select Delete List. Select  
Yes to confirm the deletion.  
6
Select Save List.  
TIP To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket  
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select  
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,  
and then select All.  
P O C K E T T U N E S ™  
128  
                                 
CHAPTER  
7
Your personal information  
organizer  
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those  
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo755P smartphone is all  
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with  
you wherever you go.  
You never lose your information, even if your battery is  
completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each  
time you synchronize, and it is kept private when you use the  
security features on your smartphone. Also, you can easily  
share info with others electronically.  
Benefits  
Track current, future, and past  
appointments  
Set reminders for appointments,  
birthdays, important tasks, and  
more  
Make to-do lists that get done  
Before you call your friend in  
London, check the time first  
   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Contacts  
Select the Contacts favorite button.  
Contacts is where you enter information  
about people you know. You can access  
this info from the Phone application to dial  
phone numbers and create favorites, and  
from the Messaging and email applications  
to send messages. When you create a  
contact, you can also assign a photo and  
ringtone ID to that contact, so you know  
when they call you.  
TIP You can also open Contacts from  
Applications View. Press Applications and  
select Contacts.  
3
4
Select New Contact.  
Use the 5-way  
to move between  
fields as you enter information.  
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses  
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you  
may be able to sync Contacts directly with the  
ActiveSync for info.  
Adding a contact  
5
(Optional) Do any of the following:  
TIP If you have several contacts to enter, it’s  
more efficient to use the Palm® Desktop  
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook®  
(sold separately) on your computer and then  
sync your smartphone with your computer.  
Add a caller ID photo: Select the  
Picture box, and then do one of the  
following:  
Select Camera to take a picture and  
add it to this contact when you  
save the picture.  
C O N T A C T S  
131  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Select Photos to add an existing  
Viewing or changing contact information  
picture to this contact.  
1
In the Contacts list, begin entering one  
of the following for the contact you  
want to view or edit:  
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the  
Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone  
from the list to give incoming calls from  
this contact a distinctive ring.  
First name (JOH for John)  
Last name (SMI for Smith)  
Place the entry in a category or mark  
it private: Select Details. (See Working  
with private entries for more info.)  
First initial and last name (JSM for  
John Smith)  
2
3
Select the name of the entry you want  
to open.  
Add a note to an entry: Select  
Note  
Display additional fields for this  
contact: Select Plus  
.
Do one of the following:  
Select Edit, make changes to the  
entry as necessary, and then select  
Done.  
.
6
After you enter all the information,  
Select Map, wait for Google Maps to  
locate matching items. Select an item,  
select To to request directions to this  
location. In the From location field,  
enter or select your starting location,  
and then select OK. When the route  
summary appears, select OK to view  
the first step in the directions. Tap the  
select Done.  
TIP You can assign a ringtone to an entire  
category of contacts. For example, use a  
special ringtone for categories such as Family,  
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category  
pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit  
Categories, and then select the category.  
Select the ringtone on the Edit Category  
screen.  
forward  
and back  
buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
view the next or previous step in the  
directions.  
C O N T A C T S  
132  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Select Map, wait for Google Maps to  
locate matching items. Select an item,  
Select From to request directions  
from this location. In the To location  
field, enter or select your destination,  
and then select OK. When the route  
summary appears, select OK to view  
the first step in the directions. Tap the  
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Business Card from the Record  
menu.  
TIP After you define your business card, you  
can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In any  
Phone view or the Contacts application, open  
the Record menu and select Beam Business  
Card.  
forward  
and back  
buttons at the bottom of the screen to  
view the next or previous step in the  
directions.  
Calendar  
TIP In the Contacts list, press Up or Down on  
the 5-way to move to the previous or next  
Contacts record.  
Calendar is a powerful organizer application  
that helps you manage your schedule. You  
can view your calendar by day, week, or  
month, or as an agenda list that combines  
your Tasks list and email notifications with  
your appointments. Schedule repeating  
meetings or block out a vacation by  
creating one event set to repeat at an  
interval you specify. Color-code your  
appointments by category and add notes  
with helpful information.  
Deleting a contact  
1
2
3
Open the contact you want to delete.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Delete Contact from the Record  
menu, and then select OK.  
Defining your business card  
1
Create a new contact and enter your  
own business card info.  
2
Open the contact entry containing your  
business card info.  
C A L E N D A R  
133  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Week View: Shows your schedule for  
an entire week. The time frames are  
based on the Start Time and End Time  
settings in Calendar Preferences.  
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses  
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you  
may be able to synchronize Calendar events  
directly with the server. See Working with  
Month View: Shows your schedule for  
a whole month.  
Displaying your calendar  
From any Calendar view, open the  
Options menu and select Year View to  
view a calendar for an entire year.  
Press Calendar  
repeatedly to cycle  
through the various views:  
Agenda View: Shows your daily  
schedule, the number of unread email  
messages, and any items on your Tasks  
list that are overdue or due today. If  
theres room, Agenda View also lists  
events on future dates.  
From any Calendar view (except Agenda  
View), use the 5-way  
to go to  
another day, week, month, or year  
(based on the current view).  
From any Calendar view (except Agenda  
View), select Go To, and then select a  
date from the calendar.  
Day View: Shows your daily schedule  
one day at a time.  
TIP You can customize your smartphone to  
display the most current Calendar event in the  
Phone applications Main View. Press Phone,  
open the Options menu, and then select  
Phone Display Options. Check the Show  
Calendar event box.  
C A L E N D A R  
134  
                                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Creating an event  
5
6
Select the End Time box and enter the  
ending hour and minute for the event.  
TIP If you have several appointments to enter,  
its more efficient to use Palm Desktop  
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook (sold  
separately) on your computer and then  
synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer. For more information, see  
(Optional) To assign a time zone to the  
event, select the Time Zone pick list  
and select a city in the time zone you  
want.  
7
8
Select OK.  
Enter a description for the event.  
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop  
software, do not add time zones to your  
events. Palm Desktop does not support  
time zones.  
1
2
Press Calendar  
appears.  
until Day View  
Press Left or Right to select the  
desired day.  
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use  
the time zone feature, but you must install  
the conduit from the Palm Software  
Installation CD that came with your Treo  
755P smartphone on all the computers with  
which you sync your smartphone. Chapura  
PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft  
Outlook conduits do not support time  
zones.  
Selected  
date  
Selected  
day  
3
4
Select New.  
Using the keyboard, enter a starting  
hour and minute for the event, such as  
545 for 5:45.  
C A L E N D A R  
135  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
4
Select OK.  
TIP To automatically assign a time zone to  
your events, open the Options menu, select  
Preferences, and check the New events use  
time zones box. All your new events will be  
assigned to your local time zone (existing  
events aren’t affected), and you can change  
the time zone setting for individual events.  
Type of time  
units  
Number of  
time units  
TIP If you want your events with time zones to  
stay at the same time in Calendar regardless  
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time  
Preferences, select the Automatically Set  
pick list, and select Date and time. If you  
select Date, time and time zone, the event  
time shifts if you travel to a different time  
information.  
DID YOU KNOW? When an alarm occurs, the  
Alert screen displays all your pending alerts.  
Select an alert description to jump to that  
item, or check the box to clear that alert.  
Creating an untimed event  
Adding an alarm to an event  
An untimed event, such as a holiday or  
deadline, does not occur at a particular  
time.  
1
2
3
In Calendar, select the event.  
Select Details.  
Check the Alarm box and select the  
number of minutes, hours, or days  
before the event that you would like to  
receive the alarm.  
1
2
3
Press Calendar  
Day View.  
until you are in  
Press Left or Right to go to the  
date of the event.  
Make sure no times are highlighted.  
TIP The alarm for untimed events is defined by  
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of  
the date of the event.  
C A L E N D A R  
136  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
4
Enter a description for the event.  
A diamond appears next to the  
description of an untimed event.  
select Other to define a custom  
interval.  
4
Select OK.  
Scheduling a repeating event  
This icon  
indicates a  
repeating  
event.  
TIP To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this  
info to the persons Contacts entry and it  
automatically appears in your Calendar.  
TIP To enter a holiday, create an untimed  
event. Then, from the Details screen, select  
Every year as the repeat interval.  
1
2
3
Create an event, and then select it.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you sync with Microsoft  
Outlook and your events include other people,  
a With field appears in the Details dialog box  
and your attendee info appears in this field  
after you sync.  
Select Details.  
Select the Repeat pick list, and then  
select a repeat interval. If the interval  
you need doesn’t appear on the list,  
C A L E N D A R  
137  
                     
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Color-coding your schedule  
Editing or deleting an event  
Use color-coding to quickly spot various  
types of events. For example, make  
appointments with family green,  
coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow  
these steps to create a category and  
assign it a color-code.  
1
Select the event you want to edit or  
delete.  
2
3
Select Details.  
In addition to the settings covered  
earlier in this chapter, you can also  
change any of the following settings:  
1
From Day View, select an event  
description or select an empty timeslot.  
Date and Time: Displays when the  
event takes place. Change these  
settings to reschedule the event.  
2
3
Select Details.  
Select the Category pick list and select  
Edit Categories.  
Location: Provides a description of  
where the event takes place.  
4
Do one of the following:  
Category: Sets the color-coded  
category for this event.  
To create a new category, select New  
and then enter a category name.  
Note  
: Provides space for you to  
To add a color to an existing category,  
select a category and select Edit.  
enter additional text.  
Delete: Removes the event from your  
calendar.  
5
6
7
Select the color you want to give this  
category, and then select OK.  
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add  
or edit more categories.  
4
Select OK.  
TIP To save memory, you can purge your old  
events. Open the Record menu and select  
Purge. Select the Delete events older than  
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.  
Select OK two more times.  
Now that the categories are set up with  
colors, you can assign categories to your  
events to color-code them. See the next  
section for details.  
C A L E N D A R  
138  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Customizing display options for your  
calendar  
the Background box, select the image  
placeholder, and then select a photo.  
Adjust the fade setting so that the text  
is easy to read against the photo.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Display Options.  
5
Select Day and set any of the following  
Day View options:  
3
4
Select the Default View pick list and  
select the view you want to see when  
you open Calendar.  
Select Agenda and set any of the  
following options:  
Show Category List: The Category  
pick list appears in Day View.  
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear  
in Day View to show the duration of an  
event and to illustrate event conflicts.  
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are  
due today and the tasks that are  
overdue appear in Agenda View.  
Compress Day View: When this box is  
unchecked, all time slots appear on the  
screen. When this box is checked, start  
and end times appear for each event,  
but blank time slots near the bottom of  
the screen disappear to minimize  
scrolling.  
Show Messages: The number of read  
and unread email messages is displayed  
in Agenda View.  
Background: A favorite photo becomes  
the Agenda View background. Check  
C A L E N D A R  
139  
                                                         
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Show Category Column: The  
7
Select OK.  
color-coded category marker appears  
between the time and the description to Selecting alarm tones  
indicate the category under which the  
event is filed.  
1
2
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Sound  
6
Select Month and set any of the  
Preferences.  
following Month View options:  
3
4
5
Select the Application pick list and  
select Calendar.  
Select the Volume pick list and select  
the volume level.  
Select the Vibrate pick list and select an  
option for how you want your  
smartphone to vibrate for an event  
alarm.  
6
Select tones from any of the following  
pick lists:  
Show Category List: The Category pick  
list appears in Month View.  
Timed Events: The events that are  
scheduled for a specific time appear in  
Month View.  
Untimed Events: The events that are  
scheduled for a specific date but not a  
specific time appear in Month View.  
Daily Repeating Events: The events  
that repeat every day appear in Month  
View.  
C A L E N D A R  
140  
                                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Alarm Sound: The tone played the first  
time your alarm goes off.  
World Clock  
Reminder Sound: The tone played if an  
alarm is not acknowledged and  
the alarm repeats itself.  
World Clock displays the day and time in  
three cities anywhere around the globe.  
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,  
its easy to keep track of the best time to  
reach your business associates, friends,  
and family in faraway places.  
Repeat: The number of times the alarm  
repeats itself if it is not acknowledged.  
Default Alarm: The default time frame  
for the alarm field.  
TIP If you did not select the option to get the  
date and time from the mobile network, you  
can set the city at the top of the screen to a  
fixed location.  
7
Select Done.  
TIP You can also record sounds and use them  
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &  
Alerts Preferences screen.  
Selecting cities  
To record a sound, select New.  
To play a sound, select it and press Center  
on the 5-way.  
To delete a sound, select it and press  
Backspace.  
To send a sound, select it and then select  
Send.  
World Clock shows the system date and  
time above the world map. If you selected  
the option to get the date and time from  
and time), your wireless service provider  
network automatically updates the time  
display to match the local time when  
you travel.  
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a  
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off (see  
Below the world map you can view the  
time in two other cities. If you travel a lot,  
you may want to select your home city as  
W O R L D C L O C K  
141  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
one of these two cities, so that you always  
know what time it is at home.  
2
3
Select Add.  
Select a location in the same time zone  
as the city you want to add, and then  
select OK.  
1
Press Applications  
World Clock  
and select  
.
4
5
Enter the name of the city.  
2
Select a City pick list, and select a city  
in the same time zone as the city you  
want to track.  
Select Location, select Map, select the  
location of the city, and then select OK.  
6
If the city does not observe daylight  
saving time, uncheck this box. If daylight  
saving time is observed, enter Start  
and End dates.  
7
Select OK.  
Setting an alarm  
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a  
hotel alarm clock to get you to that  
important meeting. Use your smartphone  
instead. World Clock includes a built-in  
alarm feature that you can use as a travel  
alarm.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can run your stylus over  
the map to see the time in other cities. The  
shadow over the map represents nighttime  
moving across the globe.  
1
2
Select Off in the upper-right corner.  
Adding cities  
Select the time you want the alarm to  
sound.  
If the city you want to display is not in the  
predefined list, you can add it.  
3
Select OK.  
1
Select a City pick list and select Edit  
List.  
W O R L D C L O C K  
142  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
3
Enter a description of the task. The text  
can be longer than one line.  
TIP To customize the alarm sound and  
volume, open the Options menu and select  
Alarm Preferences.  
Setting task priority, due date, and other  
details  
TIP Make sure the Ringer switch is set to  
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.  
The Details dialog box enables you to  
assign a priority level, due date, category,  
privacy flag, and other details for each task.  
Tasks  
1
Select the task to which you want to  
assign details.  
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks  
you need to complete and to keep a record  
of when you finish tasks.  
2
3
Select Details.  
Set any of the following:  
Priority: Select the priority number for  
this task (1 is the most important). Later  
you can arrange your tasks based on the  
importance of each task.  
Adding a task  
1
Press Applications  
Tasks  
Select New to create a new task.  
and select  
.
2
TIP You can also select the priority from the  
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a  
task and then selecting a priority level.  
T A S K S  
143  
                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Private: Check this box to mark this  
entries for additional information.  
: Select this button to enter  
additional text that you want to  
associate with the task.  
4
Select OK.  
Category: Assign the task to a specific  
category. To add a new category, select  
Edit Categories and then select New.  
TIP Press Menu to access other features such  
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks  
list.  
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list  
and select a due date for the task.  
Checking off a task  
1
2
Select the task you want to check off.  
TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option  
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can  
change the due date later by selecting the  
tasks due date in the Tasks list.  
Press Center  
or tap the box to  
check off the task.  
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.  
Repeat: Indicate whether the task  
occurs at regular intervals and how  
often it repeats. When you check off a  
repeating task, the next instance of this  
task automatically appears in your task  
list.  
T A S K S  
144  
                       
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a  
specific time frame. Select the Date  
pick list (in the title bar) to select Due  
Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or  
Past Due.  
TIP If you accidentally check off a task and  
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again  
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.  
TIP You can set Tasks to record the date that  
you completed a task, and you can select to  
show or hide completed tasks. Completed  
tasks remain in the memory of your  
smartphone until you purge them.  
DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks have an  
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.  
Organizing your tasks  
In the Tasks list, select one of these  
options:  
Category: Displays tasks that are  
assigned to the selected category.  
Select the Category pick list to select a  
different category.  
All: Displays all your tasks.  
T A S K S  
145  
             
Y O U R P E R S O N A L I N F O R M A T I O N O R G A N I Z E R  
7
Deleting a task  
3
Set any of the following preferences:  
1
2
3
Select the task you want to delete.  
Press Menu  
Sort by: Indicates the order in which  
your tasks appear in the list.  
.
Select Delete Task from the Record  
Show Completed Tasks: Displays  
menu.  
tasks you’ve checked off.  
4
Select OK.  
Record Completion Date: Replaces  
due date with the completion date  
when you complete (check off) the task.  
TIP To save memory, you can purge all  
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and  
select Purge. Select OK.  
Show Due Dates: Displays task due  
dates and inserts an exclamation point  
(!) next to overdue tasks.  
Customizing Tasks  
Tasks Preferences enable you to control  
the appearance of the Tasks list.  
Show Priorities: Displays the priority  
setting for each task.  
1
In the Tasks list, press Menu  
.
Show Categories: Displays the  
category for each task.  
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the  
alarms you assign to your tasks.  
4
Select OK.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can display your tasks in  
your calendar. See Customizing display  
2
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
T A S K S  
146  
                                         
CHAPTER  
8
Your memos and documents  
With its ability to store large amounts of important information,  
your Palm® Treo755P smartphone lets you take your office  
with you—including your Microsoft® Office and PDF files. You  
can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone  
and your computer so that you can work on them in the most  
convenient location any time.  
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos  
to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items,  
and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on  
your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice  
memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email  
message.  
Benefits  
Manage Word, Excel®,  
PowerPoint®, and PDF files on your  
smartphone  
Improve productivity by taking  
important docs, spreadsheets, and  
presentations with you  
Capture thoughts on the fly  
     
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
Here are a few more examples of what you  
can do with Documents:  
Documents To Go®  
Professional  
Send and receive email attachments in  
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat  
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).  
NOTE On your smartphone, the  
companion application for Documents To  
Go® is named Documents.  
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and  
Adobe® Acrobat® files (DOC, XLS, PPT,  
and PDF).  
With the Documents application on your  
smartphone, you can take your important  
office info with you. You can create, view,  
and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files  
directly on your smartphone. You can also  
view and manage PowerPoint and PDF  
files. For example, you can open email  
attachments, files you download with the  
web browser, and files stored on an  
Create or edit a Word-compatible  
document or Excel-compatible  
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and  
then save it in the native DOC or XLS  
format.  
Create a PowerPoint presentation on  
your computer, use the Documents To  
Go desktop application to optimize the  
file for your smartphone, and then sync  
the file onto your smartphone. View or  
edit the file on your smartphone, and  
then sync again to transfer the changes  
to the original PowerPoint file on your  
computer.  
expansion card (sold separately)—as long  
as the files are in a supported format.  
NOTE The version of Documents To Go  
that comes with your smartphone does not  
support Microsoft Office 2007. To access  
Office 2007 files on your smartphone, you  
must save the files in Office 2003 format.  
For information about an upgrade that  
supports Office 2007, go to  
NOTE The Documents application does  
not support some editing functions, such  
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.  
fees may apply).  
D O C U M E N T S T O G O ® P R O F E S S I O N A L  
149  
                             
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
Go to http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ to  
download and install the Documents To Go  
desktop software. It enables you to  
synchronize Microsoft Office files so that  
changes you make to these files show up  
on both your smartphone and your  
computer. You can save files in their native  
Office format or make use of the optimized  
Documents To Go formats.  
Opening a document  
In the Documents application, you can  
view and open any Word, Excel,  
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your  
smartphone or on an expansion card that is  
inserted into the expansion card slot.  
1
Press Applications  
Documents  
and select  
.
TIP For more info on the Documents To Go  
desktop application, click the Documents To  
Go icon on your computer, and then click  
TIP Download and install the Files application  
to easily browse and manage files on an  
expansion card. Press Applications, select  
My Treo, select the Bonus tab, and then  
info on installing applications.  
2
Select the document you want from the  
list.  
TIP When you work on a file on your  
smartphone, you can save it to your  
smartphone or to an expansion card. Open  
the File menu, select Save As, and then  
select the location where you want to save  
the file.  
D O C U M E N T S T O G O ® P R O F E S S I O N A L  
150  
             
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
Memos  
TIP You can assign categories to your memos.  
Open the memo you want to change, select  
the category pick list at the top of the screen,  
and select a category. To add a new category,  
select Edit Categories and then select New.  
Memos are a great way to store notes on  
your Treo 755P smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? Each memo can include 4,096  
characters of text.  
Deleting a memo  
1
2
3
Open the memo you want to delete.  
Press Menu  
.
Creating a memo  
Select Delete Memo from the Record  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Memos  
and select  
menu.  
.
4
Select OK.  
Enter the text you want to appear in the  
memo.  
Select Done.  
Voice Memo  
Voice Memo provides a place for you to  
record and play back notes and other  
important thoughts directly on your  
smartphone.  
NOTE Voice memos are not updated or  
backed up during synchronization.  
M E M O S  
151  
                                 
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
Creating a voice memo  
Listening to a voice memo  
When recording a voice memo, face your  
smartphones screen while speaking.  
1
Press Applications  
Voice Memo  
and select  
.
2
In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the  
voice memo title and then press  
1
Press and hold the Side button on your  
smartphone while recording your  
memo. After you finish recording,  
release the Side button.  
Center  
to select it. The voice  
memo begins to play.  
The memo is automatically saved to  
your smartphone.  
2
(Optional) Enter a title for the voice  
memo.  
TIP You can also access Voice Memo by  
pressing Applications and selecting Voice  
Memo.  
TIP If you need to pause while recording,  
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release  
the button to resume recording.  
3
Press Center  
playback.  
to pause or stop  
DID YOU KNOW? Your recording pauses  
automatically when you receive a call. If you  
ignore the call, you can press Center on the  
5-way to resume recording. If you answer the  
call, recording stops and saves your voice  
memo. You cannot resume a previous  
recording; you must start another voice  
memo.  
V O I C E M E M O  
152  
                 
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
TIP To adjust the volume level, press the  
Volume button on the side of your  
smartphone.  
TIP To change a voice memo title, open the  
Voice Memo menu and select Rename  
Memo.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a voice memo in  
an email (see the documentation for your  
email application). You can also use  
Bluetooth® wireless technology to send a  
voice memo to a nearby Bluetooth device  
V O I C E M E M O  
153  
         
Y O U R M E M O S A N D D O C U M E N T S  
8
V O I C E M E M O  
154  
CHAPTER  
9
Your application and  
info management tools  
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up  
info on your Palm® Treo755P smartphone. Synchronizing  
simply means that info you entered or updated in one place  
(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in  
the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.  
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and  
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply  
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and  
to install and run cool games and other software, from  
dictionaries to travel guides.  
Benefits  
Locate info in your applications  
with the Find feature  
Quickly enter, update, and protect  
your info on your computer and  
your smartphone  
Install applications, games, and  
other software  
Store, carry, and exchange info  
         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
4
In the search results, select the text you  
want to review, or select Find More to  
continue the search.  
Using Find  
The Find feature locates any text in the  
built-in applications and databases and  
in some third-party applications. The Find  
feature searches for the group of  
characters you specify, including characters  
that are part of a word. Find is not  
case-sensitive.  
Find also includes Google Maps links that  
help you find a location, business, or  
directions to the word you’re searching for.  
For example, to find a nearby pizza place,  
enter pizza followed by a space and your  
zip code, such as “pizza 95060.”  
Viewing and using  
the alerts  
DID YOU KNOW? Find locates any word that  
begins with the text you enter. For example,  
entering “plan” finds “planet,” but not  
“airplane.”  
The Alert screen on your smartphone  
shows info about incoming items such as  
new email messages and Calendar events.  
The Alert screen also notifies you if you  
miss a phone call.  
1
Press Option  
, and then press Shift/  
Find to open the Find dialog box.  
To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking  
bell  
corner of any screen, or press and hold  
Center when the blinking bell appears.  
when it appears in the upper-left  
2
3
Enter the text you want to find.  
Select OK to start the search.  
U S I N G F I N D  
157  
                                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
You can do any of the following:  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select  
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.  
Check the box to clear an alert from the  
list.  
Select the alert to open the  
corresponding application and view the  
alert item (message, event, missed call,  
and so on).  
Basic  
Mode  
Select Done to close the Alert screen  
and return to whatever you were doing  
on your smartphone before you opened  
the Alert screen. The bell continues to  
blink in the upper-left corner of the  
screen.  
Advanced  
Mode—Math  
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on  
the Alert screen.  
Calculator  
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus  
an advanced calculator with scientific,  
financial, and conversion functions.  
TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right  
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode.  
In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way  
to cycle between functions, and press Left on  
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.  
Switching between Basic and Advanced  
Calculator Modes  
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the onscreen  
number pad or use the keyboard to input  
numbers.  
1
Press Applications  
Calc  
and select  
.
C A L C U L A T O R  
158  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Selecting functions in Advanced  
Calculator Mode  
Length: Length conversions for metric  
and English values.  
1
Switch to Advanced Mode (see the  
preceding procedure).  
Area: Area conversions for metric,  
traditional, and English values.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Volume: Volume conversions for metric  
and English values.  
Select Options, and then select the  
type of function you want to use:  
4
5
Press Menu  
.
Math: Advanced mathematical  
functions such as exponents, roots, and  
logarithms.  
Select Pref, and then select the decimal  
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),  
or Eng(x).  
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as  
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.  
6
7
Press Menu  
.
Select Pref, and then select the number  
display format: Degrees, Radians, or  
Grads.  
Finance: Financial calculator functions  
such as APR and amortization.  
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in  
keypad, plus logic functions such as  
And, Not, Or, and Xor.  
TIP Select Sto to store a number in one of ten  
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored  
number.  
Statistics: Statistical functions such as  
sum, factorial, and random number  
generator.  
TIP Select Con to access a list of  
mathematical constants such as Avogadros  
number or the speed of light.  
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature  
conversions for metric and English  
values.  
C A L C U L A T O R  
159  
                                                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Installing bonus software from My Treo  
on your smartphone  
Installing applications  
My Treo lets you download and install  
software that you can use on your  
smartphone. If the software has both a  
desktop component in addition to a  
smartphone component, you need to  
download the software to your computer  
installing software that includes a desktop  
component.  
Your smartphone comes with several  
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You  
can also install free bonus software, such  
as business software, games, and more.  
You can install the bonus software  
wirelessly using the My Treo application on  
your smartphone. You can also download  
the bonus software from http://  
go.palm.com/treo755p/ to your computer  
and then synchronize to install it on your  
smartphone. You can use the web browser  
on your smartphone or your computer to  
1
Press Applications  
My Treo  
Select the Bonus tab.  
and select  
.
®
2
3
purchase other third-party Palm OS apps.  
To learn about applications you can  
purchase for your smartphone, go to http://  
Select the Install link below the name  
of the application you want to install.  
4
Repeat step 3 to install additional  
applications.  
NOTE The instructions in this section tell  
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS  
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)  
files on your Treo smartphone. Some Palm  
OS software uses an installer or wizard to  
guide you through the process. For details,  
consult the documentation that came with  
the software.  
Installing applications from the Internet  
You can use the web browser on your  
smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or  
PDB) directly from the Internet. When you  
download a PRC or PDB file, it is  
automatically installed on your  
smartphone. If a file is compressed (ZIP or  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
160  
                                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
SIT files), you need to download it to your  
computer and expand the file before  
installing it on your smartphone.  
Installing other third-party applications  
from a computer  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app  
from your computer to your Treo  
smartphone, you must first install  
Palm® Desktop software on your computer  
1
2
3
Open the web browser (see Viewing a  
Go to the page that contains the link to  
the application you want to download.  
Press Left or Right to highlight the  
link to the file, and then press  
When you download an application to your  
computer, it is probably in a compressed  
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is  
compressed, you need to use a  
decompression utility on your computer,  
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,  
before you install the application on your  
smartphone.  
Center  
to initiate the download  
process.  
4
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
accept and install the application.  
Installing bonus software from My Palm  
on your computer  
1
On your computer, go to http://  
go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
1
Windows: Drag and drop  
the file(s) onto the Palm  
Quick Install icon on the  
Windows desktop.  
2
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
download the application(s) you want to  
install.  
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the  
Send To Device droplet in the Palm  
folder.  
3
4
When prompted to select either Save or  
Run, select Run to place the app(s) in  
the install queue.  
2
Select your device name from the User  
list, and then click OK.  
Synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer to install the application(s) on  
your smartphone.  
I N S T A L L I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
161  
                     
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
3
Synchronize your smartphone with your  
computer to install the application(s) on  
your Treo smartphone.  
Removing  
applications  
TIP You can open a window to select whether  
to install files on your smartphone or on an  
expansion card.  
If you decide that you no longer need an  
application, or you want to free up  
memory, you can remove apps from your  
smartphone or an expansion card (for more  
on expansion cards, see Using expansion  
cards). You can remove only apps, patches,  
and extensions that you install; you cannot  
remove the built-in apps that reside in the  
ROM portion of your Treo smartphone.  
Windows: Double-click the Palm Quick  
Install icon.  
Mac: Open the HotSync menu and select  
Install Handheld files.  
TIP On a Windows computer, you can also  
access Palm Quick Install by selecting the  
Quick Install icon in Palm® Desktop software  
or from the Programs folder in the Start  
menu.  
DID YOU KNOW? Some applications are  
factory-installed on your smartphone and  
cannot be deleted. These are listed with a  
Lock icon next to them.  
Getting help with third-party applications  
If you encounter a problem with a  
third-party application (such as an error  
message), contact the applications author  
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of  
third-party applications, see Third-party  
DID YOU KNOW? Applications deleted from your  
smartphone are kept on your computer in the  
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re  
having trouble locating your user folder, see  
1
2
Press Applications  
.
If you want to remove an application  
from an expansion card, insert the card  
into your smartphone.  
R E M O V I N G A P P L I C A T I O N S  
162  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
3
4
5
Press Menu  
.
If you upgraded from a previous version  
of Palm Desktop software, your Backup  
subfolder may be located in the  
Select Delete on the App menu.  
Select the Delete From pick list and  
select the location of the application you  
palmOne or Handspring folder.  
want to remove: Phone or Card.  
2
3
If you find a PRC or PDB file for the  
application you just removed, delete the  
file from the Backup subfolder.  
6
7
8
Select the application that you want to  
remove.  
Delete the file from your device again.  
Select Delete, and then select Yes to  
confirm the deletion.  
Synchronize to remove the application  
from the Backup folder on your  
computer.  
Viewing application  
info  
Manually deleting applications  
The Info screens display basic statistics  
about the applications on your Treo  
smartphone.  
If an app you delete reappears on your  
smartphone, you may need to manually  
delete the app from your computer.  
1
2
3
4
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
1
Locate your Backup subfolder on your  
computer.  
.
Windows: C:\Program  
Files\Palm\<device name>.  
Select Info on the App menu.  
Select the Device pick list and select the  
location of the app you want to view  
Mac: Mac  
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device  
name>.  
info for: Phone or <card name>  
.
V I E W I N G A P P L I C A T I O N I N F O  
163  
                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Sending information  
with Bluetooth®  
wireless technology  
The range of Bluetooth® wireless  
technology is up to 30 feet/10 meters in  
optimum environmental conditions.  
Performance and range may be affected by  
physical obstacles, radio interference from  
nearby electronic equipment, and other  
factors.  
Version: The version numbers of  
applications on your smartphone.  
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of  
applications and information on your  
smartphone.  
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection  
Records: The number of entries in  
various applications on your  
smartphone.  
In most applications you can send an  
individual entry or item such as a contact or  
a picture. You can also send all the entries  
in a category, such as all contacts in the  
Business category.  
5
6
Scroll to the application you want to see  
info about.  
Select Done.  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
.
2
3
Select Bluetooth On.  
Open an application.  
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
164  
                         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
4
Select the entry or category you want to  
send. You cannot send an item that has  
7
Select the application you want to  
transfer. You cannot send an item that  
a lock  
next to it.  
has a lock  
next to it.  
5
6
7
8
Press Menu  
.
8
9
Select Send.  
Select Send from the leftmost menu.  
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.  
Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.  
10 Select the receiving device(s) on the  
Discovery Results screen, and then  
select OK.  
Select the receiving device(s) in the  
Discovery Results list, and then select  
OK.  
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the  
transfer is complete before you  
9
Wait for a message to indicate that the  
transfer is complete before you  
continue using your smartphone.  
continue using your smartphone.  
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection  
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
.
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
.
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
Select Bluetooth On.  
Select the Visibility pick list and select  
one of the following:  
Press Applications  
.
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that  
are not on your Trusted Device list to  
request a connection with your  
smartphone. Your smartphone remains  
accessible to other devices until you  
turn this option off. After you’ve finished  
using this setting, remember to change  
it back to Hidden.  
Press Menu  
.
Select Send from the App menu.  
Select the Send From pick list and  
select the location of the app you want  
to send: Phone or <card name>  
.
S E N D I N G I N F O R M A T I O N W I T H B L U E T O O T H ® W I R E L E S S T E C H N O L O G Y  
165  
                             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices  
that are not on your Trusted Device list  
to request a connection with your  
smartphone during the next two  
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to  
the Hidden setting and becomes  
inaccessible to other devices after two  
minutes.  
TIP The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is  
the name other devices with Bluetooth  
wireless technology see when they connect  
to your smartphone. The default name is the  
name you gave your device during setup. You  
can change this name if you want to.  
DID YOU KNOW? When you receive an  
application over a Bluetooth connection, you  
can store the application on your smartphone  
or send it to an expansion card inserted into  
the expansion card slot.  
4
Use the other device to discover your  
smartphone and send information to it:  
See the other device’s documentation  
to learn how to discover and send  
information over a Bluetooth wireless  
connection.  
Beaming information  
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound  
Your Treo 755P smartphone is equipped  
with an IR (infrared) port so that you can  
On  
, your smartphone beeps to  
notify you of the connection, and then  
prompts you to accept the info. Select  
a category or expansion card to  
specify where you want to store the  
item. If you don’t select a category,  
the item goes into the Unfiled  
category.  
®
beam information to another Palm OS  
device with an IR port. The IR port is  
located on the side of your smartphone,  
above the expansion card slot door, behind  
the small dark shield.  
TIP For best results, the path between the  
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and  
both devices must be stationary. If you have  
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and  
avoid bright sunlight.  
5
Select Yes to receive the information or  
No to refuse it.  
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
166  
                 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Beaming an entry  
smartphone directly at the IR port on  
the receiving device.  
You can beam an individual entry or item  
such as a contact or a picture. You can also  
beam all the entries in the selected  
category, such as all the contacts in the  
Business or Family category.  
5
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to  
indicate that the transfer is complete  
before you continue using your  
smartphone.  
TIP Beam your business card in two key  
presses: From the Phone applications Main  
View, press Menu, and then press the M key.  
1
Select the entry or category you want to  
beam. You cannot beam an item that  
has a lock  
next to it.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Beaming an application  
Select Record, and then select one of  
the following:  
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock  
icon  
appears on the Beam screen next  
Beam: Sends an individual entry.  
to applications that cannot be beamed.  
Beam Category: Sends all entries in  
the current category.  
1
2
3
4
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
.
Select Beam from the App menu.  
DID YOU KNOW? If you beam a bookmark or  
saved page from the web browser, it beams  
the URL, not the contents of that page.  
Select the Beam From pick list, and  
select whether the application you want  
to beam is located on your Treo  
smartphone or on an expansion card.  
4
When the Beam Status dialog box  
appears, point the IR port on your  
B E A M I N G I N F O R M A T I O N  
167  
                           
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
5
Select the application you want to  
transfer.  
TIP If you do not select a category upon  
receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in  
the Unfiled category.  
6
7
Select Beam.  
When the Beam Status dialog box  
appears, point the IR port on your  
smartphone directly at the IR port on  
the receiving device.  
TIP If you can’t receive beamed information,  
make sure the Beam Receive option is turned  
on (see Optimizing power settings) and that  
you are not running a third-party application  
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive  
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your  
8
Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to  
indicate that the transfer is complete  
before you continue using your  
smartphone.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can store a beamed  
application on your smartphone, or send it to  
an expansion card inserted into the expansion  
card slot.  
Receiving beamed information  
1
2
Turn on your screen.  
Select the beam command on the  
transmitting device.  
Synchronizing  
information—  
advanced  
3
Point the IR port on your smartphone  
directly at the IR port on the  
transmitting device to open the Beam  
Status dialog box.  
4
5
When the Beam Status dialog box  
appears, select a category for the entry.  
Changing which applications sync  
By default, information from Calendar,  
Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks  
is updated each time you synchronize your  
smartphone with Palm Desktop software  
(included) or Microsoft Outlook (sold  
Select Yes to receive the information or  
No to refuse it.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
168  
                       
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
separately). You can change which  
Select Do nothing to turn off  
applications synchronize. For example, if  
you don’t use the Memos application and  
synchronization for an app that currently  
synchronizes (for example, to turn off  
you want to speed up synchronization, you  
can turn off synchronization for Memos.  
synchronization for Memos if you do not  
use this app).  
TIP Windows If you set up your  
smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can  
learn how to change which applications  
synchronize, by doing the following: Click the  
HotSync® manager icon in the taskbar and  
select Custom. Select a conduit that syncs  
with Outlook, click Change, and then click  
Help.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite  
options if you want the information in one  
location (smartphone or computer) to  
completely replace the information in the  
other location for that app. For example, if  
the Calendar info on your smartphone is  
accurate but the info on your computer has  
become corrupted, select Handheld  
overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app  
to have your smartphone info replace your  
computer info. Note that “handheld” refers  
to your smartphone and “desktop” refers  
to your computer.  
1
Click HotSync manager  
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your  
screen.  
in the  
2
3
Select Custom.  
Select your device name from the User  
list at the top of the screen.  
4
5
Select the application for which you  
want to turn synchronization on or off,  
and then click Change.  
Select Synchronize the files to turn on  
synchronization for an app.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
169  
     
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
6
7
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for  
each application for which you want to  
turn synchronization on or off.  
synchronization for Memos if you do not  
use this app).  
Click OK, and then click Done.  
TIP Windows To keep the current sync  
setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as  
default box. If you do not check this box, the  
option you select applies only the next time  
you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated  
according to the default setting.  
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite  
options if you want the information in one  
location (smartphone or computer) to  
completely replace the information in the  
other location for that app. For example, if  
the Calendar info on your smartphone is  
accurate but the info on your computer has  
become corrupted, select Handheld  
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar  
app to have your smartphone info replace  
your computer info. Note that “handheld”  
refers to your smartphone.  
MAC ONLY  
1
2
3
4
Double-click the Palm Desktop  
in the Palm folder.  
icon  
From the HotSync menu, select  
Conduit Settings.  
From the User pop-up menu, select  
your device name.  
Select the application for which you  
want to turn synchronization on or off,  
and then click Conduit Settings.  
5
Select Synchronize the files to turn on  
synchronization for an app.  
6
(Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for  
each application for which you want to  
turn synchronization on or off.  
Select Do nothing to turn off  
synchronization for an app that currently  
synchronizes (for example, to turn off  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
170  
 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
7
Click OK, and then close the Conduit  
Settings window.  
3
4
Enter a device name for your  
smartphone. This is the name that  
appears on the other Bluetooth devices  
screen when it connects to your  
smartphone.  
TIP Mac To keep the current setting on an  
ongoing basis, select Make Default. If you do  
not select this button, the option you select  
applies only the next time you synchronize.  
Thereafter, info is updated according to the  
default setting.  
Select the Visibility pick list and select  
Visible or Temporary  
.
TIP After you form a partnership with a device,  
you can change the Visibility setting to  
Hidden. That way only devices with which  
you’ve already formed a partnership can find  
your smartphone. New devices cannot  
request a connection.  
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for  
synchronization  
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth  
wireless technology, you can synchronize  
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.  
5
6
Select Setup Devices.  
1
Press Applications  
Bluetooth  
Select Bluetooth On.  
and select  
Select HotSync Setup.  
.
2
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
171  
                   
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
7
8
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
create a partnership between your  
smartphone and your computer.  
In some cases you may need to  
perform setup steps on your computer  
before you can complete this step.  
Check your computers documentation  
for specific setup instructions.  
1
Press Applications  
and select  
HotSync  
.
After you finish the HotSync Setup,  
select Done to return to Applications  
View.  
You’re now ready to sync your smartphone  
with your Bluetooth computer.  
2
3
Select Local.  
Select the pick list below the HotSync  
icon, and then select the name of the  
PC you set up for Bluetooth  
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth  
connection  
When you synchronize using your  
smartphones Bluetooth wireless feature,  
you don’t need your sync cable. This is  
especially useful if you travel with a laptop  
enabled with Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
4
Select the HotSync  
smartphone.  
icon on your  
When synchronization is complete, a  
message appears at the top of your  
smartphone screen. Be patient;  
synchronization may take a few minutes.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
172  
           
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Synchronizing over an infrared  
connection  
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Check the following  
on your computer:  
It must have an enabled IR port and  
driver or have an IR device attached to  
it. Check your computers  
documentation to see if it supports IR  
communication.  
2
On your smartphone, press  
HotSync manager must be active. On a  
Windows computer, you know HotSync  
manager is active when its icon appears  
in the lower-right corner of your screen.  
Applications  
HotSync  
and select  
.
3
4
Select Local.  
When you synchronize using your  
smartphones IR port, you don’t need a  
cable. This is especially useful if you travel  
with an IR-enabled laptop.  
Select the pick list below the HotSync  
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.  
5
6
Position the IR port on your smartphone  
within a few inches of the IR port on  
your computer.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
Select the HotSync  
icon on your  
1
On your computer, click HotSync  
manager in the taskbar in the  
lower-right corner of your screen. Make  
smartphone.  
When synchronization is complete, a  
message appears at the top of your  
smartphone screen. Be patient;  
sure that Infrared is selected.  
synchronization may take a few minutes.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
173  
         
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
MAC ONLY  
Synchronizing using Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync®  
1
2
3
4
5
Double-click HotSync manager  
the Palm folder.  
in  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® works  
with the VersaMail® application, Calendar,  
and Contacts applications on your  
smartphone to directly access corporate  
groupware information in Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007. If your  
company uses Microsoft Exchange Server  
2003 or 2007, you may be able to  
wirelessly synchronize info in these  
applications on the server from your  
smartphone without using a desktop  
computer.  
Click the HotSync Controls tab, and  
then select Enabled.  
Click the Connection Settings tab, and  
then check the On box next to IR port.  
Close the HotSync Software Setup  
window.  
On your smartphone, press  
Applications  
HotSync  
and select  
.
6
7
Select Local.  
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account  
interacts with your desktop software as  
follows:  
Select the pick list below the HotSync  
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.  
8
9
Position the IR port on your smartphone  
within a few inches of the IR port on  
your computer.  
Microsoft Outlook (sold separately):  
Info in Calendar, Contacts, and the  
VersaMail application on your  
Select the HotSync  
icon on your  
smartphone is pushed from or syncs  
with the server; it does not sync directly  
with Outlook on your desktop. However,  
if the server pushes info to or syncs  
with Outlook on your desktop, any info  
you enter in these applications on your  
smartphone also appears in Outlook  
after the next server push or sync.  
smartphone.  
When synchronization is complete, a  
message appears at the top of your  
smartphone screen. Be patient;  
synchronization may take a few minutes.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z I N G I N F O R M A T I O N — A D V A N C E D  
174  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
NOTE Push is a feature provided by  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync that  
pushes email messages, Calendar events,  
meeting invitations, and updated contact  
information it receives onto your  
smartphone.  
Using expansion  
cards  
The expansion card slot on your Treo  
smartphone enables you to add miniSD  
cards (sold separately) to extend the  
storage capacity of your smartphone. For  
example, expansion cards can store the  
following:  
Palm Desktop software: Info in  
Calendar, Contacts, and the VersaMail  
application does not sync with and does  
not appear in Palm Desktop software on  
your computer.  
Photos  
NOTE Info in other apps, such as Tasks  
and Memos, continues to sync with and  
appear in the desktop software on your  
computer (Outlook or Palm Desktop  
software).  
MP3 audio files  
Email attachments  
Games  
eBooks  
Microsoft Office files  
Adobe Acrobat files  
Applications  
Databases  
For complete information on using a  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account,  
see the User Guide for the VersaMail®  
Application at  
Inserting an expansion card  
The expansion card slot on your  
smartphone has a push-push mechanism:  
push in gently to insert a card; push in  
gently to remove it.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
175  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
1
Open the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
DID YOU KNOW? If the Ringer switch is set to  
Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when  
you insert or remove an expansion card.  
4
Close the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
Removing an expansion card  
1
Open the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
2
3
Hold your smartphone with the screen  
facing you, and hold the card with the  
label facing you. The notch on the card  
should be in the lower-left corner next to  
the keyboard.  
Insert the card into the expansion card  
slot until you feel the card lock into  
place.  
2
3
Press the card into the expansion card  
slot to release it from the slot.  
After you feel the expansion card slot  
eject the card, remove the card  
from the slot.  
Notch  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
176  
 
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
2
3
Select the icon for the application you  
want to open.  
Press Center  
to open the  
application.  
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily  
browse and manage files on an expansion  
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,  
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.  
4
Close the door of the expansion card  
slot.  
Accessing items stored on an expansion  
card  
Opening applications on an expansion  
card  
When an expansion card contains items,  
such as pictures or songs, you can access  
those items directly from the card.  
After you insert an expansion card into the  
expansion card slot, you can open any of  
the applications stored on the expansion  
card.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
2
3
Select the category pick list in the title  
bar, and select All.  
Select the icon for the application in  
which you want to open the item. For  
example, to view a picture, select  
Pics&Videos.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
177  
             
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
Copying applications between an  
expansion card and your smartphone  
4
5
Select the Copy To pick list and select  
the destination: Phone or <card  
name>.  
TIP Before you copy an application to an  
expansion card, make sure that it is  
compatible with Palm OS software version  
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work  
with expansion cards and do not allow you to  
store files in a location that is separate from  
the application.  
Select the From pick list and select the  
location of the application you want to  
copy: Phone or <card name>.  
6
7
Highlight the application you want to  
copy.  
Select Copy.  
You can copy applications from your Treo  
smartphone to your expansion card and  
vice versa.  
Viewing expansion card information  
1
Press Applications  
.
The Card Info application displays general  
information about the expansion card that  
is currently in the expansion card slot. It  
also enables you to rename and format a  
card.  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
Select Copy from the App menu.  
Press Applications  
Card Info  
and select  
.
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
178  
                           
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
5
Select Rename Card from the Card  
menu.  
TIP Before copying information to, renaming,  
or formatting an expansion card, make sure  
the card is not write-protected. See the  
instructions that came with your card for  
details.  
6
7
Enter a new name for the card.  
Select Rename.  
Formatting an expansion card  
Renaming an expansion card  
Formatting an expansion card is similar to  
formatting a disk on a computer. When  
you format an expansion card, you erase all  
the information stored on the card.  
If you change the contents of an expansion  
card, you can rename the card to better  
match its contents and to make it easy to  
identify wherever you insert it.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
1
Insert the expansion card into the  
expansion card slot. Applications View  
automatically appears.  
2
Select the category pick list at the top  
of the screen and select All.  
2
Select the category pick list at the top  
of the screen and select All.  
3
4
5
6
Select Card Info  
.
3
4
Select Card Info  
.
Press Menu  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Format Card from the Card menu.  
Select OK.  
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
179  
               
Y O U R A P P L I C A T I O N A N D I N F O M A N A G E M E N T T O O L S  
9
U S I N G E X P A N S I O N C A R D S  
180  
CHAPTER  
10  
Your personal settings  
Customizing your Palm® Treo755P smartphone is a great way  
to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.  
On your smartphone, you can easily customize the sounds,  
fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different  
levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive)  
phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help  
extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of  
ways to make your smartphone work better for you.  
Benefits  
Access applications quickly  
Conserve power  
Make your screen easy to read  
Enjoy your smartphone more  
   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
When you slide the Ringer switch back to  
System sound  
settings  
Sound On  
, it restores the previous  
sound settings.  
Silencing sounds  
You can immediately silence all alerts,  
ringtones, music that plays through the  
built-in speaker, and system sounds by  
sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off  
This does not mute the audio during a  
phone call.  
.
Sound On  
Sound Off  
Setting system volume levels  
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a  
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the  
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For info on  
setting the vibrate option, see the section on  
setting alert tones in the chapters that  
describe the individual applications.  
You can set the volume level for system  
sounds, such as the tone that plays when  
you synchronize.  
TIP If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,  
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings  
and all sounds are turned off.  
1
2
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound  
Off . Your smartphone vibrates once  
to let you know that you’ve turned  
sounds off.  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Sounds  
and select  
.
Select the Application pick list and  
select System.  
To hear all sounds again, slide the  
Ringer switch to Sound On  
.
Select the System Volume and Game  
Volume pick lists and select the volume  
levels.  
S Y S T E M S O U N D S E T T I N G S  
183  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
2
3
Press Left and Right to adjust the  
brightness.  
Select Done.  
TIP To automatically set the backlight to the  
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.  
TIP You can also adjust the backlight and set  
the brightness duration during a call in Power  
Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.  
4
Select Done.  
Changing the screen font  
You can change the screen font in  
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,  
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary  
between applications and some  
Display and  
appearance settings  
applications may offer fewer choices.  
Adjusting the brightness  
1
Open the application in which you want  
to change the font.  
Depending on the lighting conditions in  
which you’re using your smartphone, you  
may need to adjust the brightness of the  
screen and keyboard backlight.  
2
3
4
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Font.  
Select a font style. (In the web browser,  
select the Font size pick list and select  
Large or Small.)  
1
Press Option  
, and then press  
Backlight  
.
Backlight  
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S  
184  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Small  
Large  
Large bold  
Small bold  
Select OK.  
5
Setting display formats  
Formats Preferences enable you to select  
number conventions based on geographic  
regions. For example, in the United  
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a  
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is  
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an  
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in  
applications on your Treo smartphone use  
the Formats Preferences settings.  
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM  
to display a 24-hour clock.  
Date: The date format.  
Week starts: The first day of the week  
(usually Sunday or Monday).  
Numbers: The format for numbers with  
decimal points and commas.  
4
Select Done.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Formats.  
and select  
.
Aligning the screen  
2
3
Occasionally, your smartphone screen may  
need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you  
may see the wrong feature being activated  
when you tap the screen. To fix the  
problem, you can align the screen at any  
time.  
Set any of the following preferences:  
Preset to: The standard number  
conventions for your country. When you  
select a country, the other Formats  
Preferences are automatically set to  
that countrys conventions. You can also  
edit each option individually.  
D I S P L A Y A N D A P P E A R A N C E S E T T I N G S  
185  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Touchscreen.  
and select  
.
2
3
Follow the onscreen instructions and  
tap the screen where indicated.  
4
Select Done.  
TIP You can also set the wallpaper for the  
Phone applications Main View (see  
Main View) and the background for the  
Calendar Agenda View (see Customizing  
4
Select Done.  
Changing the system color scheme  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Color Theme.  
Select a color scheme from the list.  
and select  
Applications settings  
.
2
3
You can change the Applications settings  
on your smartphone so that you can easily  
access the applications you use most  
often. You can arrange and display your  
applications by category, reassign  
the buttons on your smartphone, and  
select default applications for specific  
tasks.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S  
186  
           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Arranging applications by category  
Select the category pick list at the top  
of the screen and select a category.  
Select All to display all of your  
applications.  
You can assign an application to a category  
and then display a specific category of  
applications in Applications View.  
1
2
3
4
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
Changing Applications View  
.
By default, Applications View displays each  
application as an icon. As an alternative,  
you can view a list of applications. The list  
view is particularly useful when you have  
so many applications in a category that the  
applications fill up more than one screen.  
Select Category on the App menu.  
Select the pick list next to each  
application and select a category.  
5
Select Done.  
TIP To create a new category, select the  
category pick list and select Edit Categories.  
Select New, and then enter the category  
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and  
then select OK.  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
Press Menu  
.
.
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
4
5
Select the View By pick list and select  
List.  
DID YOU KNOW? If there is an expansion card in  
the expansion card slot, the card appears in  
the category pick list and is treated as a  
category when you press Applications  
repeatedly.  
Select OK.  
Reassigning buttons  
With Buttons Preferences you can select  
which applications are associated with the  
quick buttons and the Side button on your  
Treo smartphone. You can assign a primary  
and secondary application to each of the  
Displaying applications by category  
Do one of the following:  
Press Applications  
repeatedly to  
cycle through the categories.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S  
187  
                                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
three quick buttons that open an  
application.  
4
Select Done.  
DID YOU KNOW? You can also choose an  
application to open with the sync button on  
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,  
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences  
screen.  
NOTE We recommend that you keep the  
primary button assignments on the factory  
settings until you become comfortable with  
the features of your smartphone. If you do  
change the primary button assignments,  
remember that the instructions in this  
guide and in the other help features refer to  
the original button settings.  
TIP To restore all the buttons and key  
combinations to their factory settings, select  
Default.  
DID YOU KNOW? Some third-party applications  
automatically take over a button when you  
install the application.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Buttons.  
Select the pick list next to the button,  
Option + button, or Side button that  
and select  
.
2
3
Changing default applications  
Sometimes one application looks for  
another application to handle information  
(for example, a mail application might open  
a browser when you select a link in an  
email message). Your smartphone comes  
with a set of predefined applications to  
handle email, messaging, and browser  
requests from other applications. If you  
have more than one application to handle  
these requests on your smartphone, you  
can specify which application you want to  
use for each function.  
you want to reassign, and then select  
an application.  
A P P L I C A T I O N S S E T T I N G S  
188  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the  
Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard  
and all buttons to prevent accidental  
presses in your bag or pocket.  
Screen: You can disable the screen’s  
touch-sensitive feature during an active call  
or call alert.  
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your  
phone to require a password to make calls.  
The built-in security software lets you  
make emergency calls even if your phone  
is locked.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Default Apps.  
and select  
.
2
3
Select each pick list and select the  
application you want to associate with  
that function.  
Smartphone: You can set your  
smartphone to require a password for you  
to see any information on your  
smartphone.  
4
Select Done.  
Entries: You can mask or hide entries  
marked as private and set your smartphone  
to require a password for viewing them.  
Locking your  
smartphone and info  
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)  
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so  
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or  
activate items on the screen while your  
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.  
Your Treo smartphone includes several  
features to protect your smartphone  
from inadvertent use and keep your  
information private. You can lock any of the  
following features on your smartphone:  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
189  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever  
the screen is off. Each time you wake up  
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to  
unlock the keyboard and use your  
smartphone.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Keyguard.  
and select  
.
2
3
Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and  
then do one of the following:  
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:  
Select how quickly you want Keyguard  
to turn on: When power is turned  
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30  
seconds after power off.  
1
When the screen is off, press Power/  
End to wake up the screen.  
Press Center to turn off Keyguard.  
2
Select Disable to completely disable  
the Keyguard feature until you turn it  
on again.  
4
Select Done.  
Locking your screen  
You can set your smartphone to  
automatically lock the screens  
touch-sensitive features in certain  
situations.  
TIP If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn  
Keyguard on manually by pressing Option +  
Power/End when the screen is on.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Keyguard.  
and select  
.
2
3
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns  
on, or you can disable this feature  
altogether. To change the Keyguard  
settings, do the following:  
Check any of the following boxes:  
Incoming calls received: Disables the  
screen when the phone rings. You must  
use the 5-way  
to select the  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
190  
                   
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,  
TIP When Phone Lock is turned on, other  
or press Send  
or Power/End  
to answer the call  
to ignore the call.  
people can still see the info on your  
smartphone, but they cannot make calls or  
use the other wireless features without your  
password.  
On a call: Disables the screen after  
you answer a call. You must use the  
5-way  
to select the onscreen  
buttons during the call. Use this setting  
to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen  
buttons while you’re holding your  
1
2
3
Press Phone  
.
Press Menu  
.
Select Options, and then select Phone  
Lock.  
smartphone near your ear to speak.  
4
Select Done.  
4
(Optional) Select Advanced, enter up  
to three numbers that you can dial  
when your phone is locked, and then  
select OK. You do not need to enter the  
standard emergency call number for  
your area, such as 911, as one of the  
three numbers, because this number is  
always available.  
DID YOU KNOW? When you check the boxes to  
disable the touchscreen during a call, the  
touchscreen is automatically enabled again  
after you end the call.  
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)  
You can lock your phone to prevent  
unauthorized calls and use of other  
wireless features. When your phone is  
locked, you must enter the correct code to  
unlock it. You can still place emergency  
calls when your phone is locked, however.  
5
Select one of the following Phone Lock  
options:  
On phone power off: Locks your phone  
each time you turn it off. When this  
setting is active, you must enter your  
lock code each time you turn your phone  
on again.  
Immediately: Locks your phone when  
you select OK. The next time you dial a  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
191  
                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
number, you must enter your lock code  
2
Select Options, and then select Phone  
to unlock your phone. After that, you  
can continue to make calls without  
entering your lock code, unless you  
select one of these Phone Lock options.  
Lock.  
3
4
Uncheck the On phone power off box.  
Enter your lock code to change this  
setting.  
6
7
8
When prompted, enter the lock code,  
and then select OK. (Unless you  
changed your lock code, it is the last  
four digits of your phone number.)  
5
Select OK twice.  
Locking your smartphone  
To protect your personal information, you  
can lock your smartphone. When your  
smartphone is locked, you need to enter  
your password to access any of your  
information or to use any of the features on  
your smartphone, including the phone. You  
can still make emergency calls, however,  
when your smartphone is locked.  
If you want to change the lock code,  
select Change Lock Code, enter a new  
lock code, and then select OK. Repeat  
this step to verify the new lock code.  
Select OK.  
If you selected Immediately in step 5, your  
phone locks right away. If you selected On  
phone power off, your phone locks the next  
time you press and hold Power/End  
to turn off your phone.  
IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone,  
you must enter the exact password to  
unlock it. If you forget the password, you  
need to perform a hard reset to resume  
using your smartphone. Performing a hard  
reset deletes all the entries in your  
TIP If you want to lock your phone once in a  
while, use the Immediately option to lock your  
phone on demand.  
smartphone. However, you can restore all  
previously synchronized info the next time  
To disable the current Phone Lock settings: you sync (see Synchronizing information—  
1
Press Menu  
.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
192  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
1
2
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
.
Select the Password box.  
On power off: Locks your smartphone  
when you turn off the screen, or when it  
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.  
At a preset time: Locks your  
smartphone at a specific time of day.  
3
4
5
Assign a password and a password hint.  
Select the Auto Lock Device box.  
After a preset delay: Locks your  
smartphone after a period of inactivity.  
When prompted, enter your password  
and select OK.  
7
8
Select OK.  
6
Select one of the following options:  
Do one of the following:  
Never: Prevents your smartphone from  
locking automatically.  
Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your  
smartphone immediately.  
Press Applications  
to accept  
your settings and continue using your  
smartphone.  
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
193  
               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal  
private entries without a password.  
TIP After you create a password, you can lock  
your system manually. Press Applications  
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,  
and then select Off & Lock.  
1
Display the entry that you want to mark  
private.  
TIP To change your password, select the  
Password box, enter your current password,  
and then enter the new password. To delete  
your password, select the Password box and  
then select Unassign.  
2
3
4
Select Details.  
Check the Private box.  
Select OK.  
Hiding or masking all private entries  
Working with private entries  
Make sure the entries you want to mask or  
hide are marked private.  
In most applications you can mark  
individual entries as private. All private  
entries remain visible and accessible until  
you select the Security setting. You have  
two Security setting options:  
1
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
.
2
Select the Current Privacy pick list and  
select either Hide Records or Mask  
Records.  
Hide Records: Private entries do not  
appear anywhere in the application.  
3
If prompted for your password, enter it  
Mask Records: Private entries are  
replaced with a visual placeholder  
where the entry would normally appear.  
and then select OK.  
Viewing all private records  
After you enable the mask or hide setting,  
any entries marked as private are  
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden  
or masked.  
immediately hidden or masked. If you  
define a password, you must enter it to  
display private entries. If you do not define  
1
Press Applications  
Security  
and select  
.
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
194  
                                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
2
3
Select the Current Privacy pick list and  
select Show Records.  
3
4
Select Lost Password.  
Select Ye s .  
If prompted for your password, enter it  
TIP If you want additional security for  
Palm Desktop files, you may want to  
purchase a third-party solution.  
and then select OK.  
TIP You can also access the systemwide  
security settings while you’re in an  
application, such as Calendar. Press Menu,  
select Options, and then select Security.  
Entering owner information  
You can use Owner Preferences to record  
information that you want to associate with  
your Treo smartphone, such as your name,  
company name, and home phone number.  
If you lock your smartphone (see Locking  
your smartphone), the Owner Preferences  
information appears on the screen that  
requests your password to unlock it, and  
you must also enter your password to  
change the Owner Preferences  
Security and Palm® Desktop software  
(Windows)  
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop  
software observes the security password  
for your Treo smartphone. If you forget  
your password, you cannot view your  
information in Palm Desktop software. If  
your smartphone is unlocked, you can  
change your password on your  
information.  
smartphone, but all entries marked as  
private are deleted. You can restore your  
private entries the next time you sync.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select Owner.  
and select  
.
2
3
Follow these steps to recover from a lost  
password:  
If you assigned a password with the  
Security application, select Unlock,  
enter your password, and then select  
OK to continue.  
1
Press Applications  
Security  
Select the Password box.  
and select  
.
2
L O C K I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E A N D I N F O  
195  
                               
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
4
Enter the text that you want to appear in  
2
Select Date & Time.  
the Owner Preferences screen.  
3
Select the Automatically set pick list  
5
Select Done.  
and select one of the following settings:  
NOTE The options that appear on the  
screen vary based on the setting you select  
in step 3.  
System settings  
Nothing: No info is acquired from your  
wireless service provider network. You  
must set the date, time, and time zone  
yourself.  
Setting the date and time  
By default, your smartphone synchronizes  
the date, time, and time zone with the  
network when your phone is on and you  
are inside a coverage area. Date & Time  
Preferences also enable you to manually  
set the date, time, and location (time zone)  
setting for your smartphone.  
Date and time: The date and time are  
acquired from your wireless service  
provider network. You must set the time  
zone yourself.  
Date, time, and time zone: The date,  
time, and time zone are acquired from  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
and select  
.
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
196  
                 
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
your wireless service provider network.  
You cannot change any of the settings.  
2
3
Select Power.  
Set any of the following preferences:  
4
If the Location pick list appears, select  
it, and then select a city in your time  
zone.  
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the  
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag  
the slider or press Left and Right  
to adjust the brightness level.  
TIP Don’t see a city in your time zone? Select  
Edit List, select Add, select a city in your  
time zone, and then select OK. If necessary,  
modify any of the settings in the Edit  
Location dialog box, and then select OK.  
5
6
If the Date and Time fields appear,  
select the Date field and select the  
date, and then select the Time field and  
select the time.  
Auto-off after: Determines how long  
your screen stays on during a period of  
inactivity. When there is no interaction  
with the keyboard or screen for the  
specified time period, your smartphone  
turns off automatically.  
Select Done.  
TIP You can also set time zones for Calendar  
events. See Creating an event.  
Optimizing power settings  
Power Preferences enable you to adjust  
settings to maximize your smartphone’s  
battery performance.  
On a call, dim backlight after:  
Determines how long the backlight  
stays on at normal intensity during a  
phone call. After the specified time  
period, the backlight dims to conserve  
power during a long phone call.  
1
Press Applications  
Prefs  
and select  
.
S Y S T E M S E T T I N G S  
197  
                           
Y O U R P E R S O N A L S E T T I N G S  
10  
Beam Receive: Determines whether  
your Treo smartphone is ready to  
receive information over an infrared  
server through the companys firewall  
(security layer). You need a VPN client on  
your smartphone if your smartphone and  
beam. If you leave this option turned off, your company’s server are located on  
you must return to this screen to turn  
on this option the next time you want to  
receive a beam.  
opposite sides of the firewall.  
Check with your company’s system  
administrator to see if a VPN is required to  
access the corporate server. If a VPN is  
necessary, you must purchase and install a  
third-party VPN client on your smartphone  
to use this feature.  
4
Select Done.  
TIP You can also access the brightness setting  
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily dim  
the screens brightness, press Option +  
Menu.  
client software, visit http://go.palm.com/  
treo755p/.  
Connection settings  
1
2
Install your third-party VPN client. See  
Connecting to a virtual private network  
Press Applications  
Prefs  
Select VPN.  
and select  
If you want to use your Treo smartphone to  
access your corporate email account or  
other files on your corporate server, you  
may need to set up a virtual private  
network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN  
enables you to log in to your corporate  
.
3
4
Enter the settings provided by your  
corporate system administrator.  
C O N N E C T I O N S E T T I N G S  
198  
                         
CHAPTER  
11  
Common questions  
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,  
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly  
asked questions. For additional information and answers to  
other common questions, visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
   
In this chapter  
Making room on your Treosmartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Set data connection features, such as  
activating or ending data connections  
Upgrading  
Provide web clipping features, such as  
PQA files  
If you experience problems with your  
Palm® Treo755P smartphone after  
performing the upgrade steps in Upgrading  
from another Palm OS® device of this  
guide, you may have incompatible  
applications or settings that were not  
quarantined during the installation process.  
These incompatible applications or settings  
can lead to numerous issues, including  
system resets and freezes. If you  
Provide instant messaging features  
If you want to continue using these types  
of applications, please contact the  
third-party developer for software updates  
and info about compatibility with your Treo  
755P smartphone.  
WINDOWS ONLY  
Windows Vista users: Before inserting  
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to  
you’ll find instructions and information  
about using your smartphone and desktop  
software with Windows Vista.  
experience a problem after upgrading,  
follow the steps in this section to remove  
the incompatible apps from your  
smartphone and to transfer your other info  
to your smartphone.  
NOTE If you have trouble installing a  
third-party application, contact the  
developer for assistance.  
1
On your computer, click  
Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.  
2
3
Follow the instructions on the screen.  
We recommend that you do not install  
apps that do any of the following:  
Locate the Old_Apps folder on your  
computer. This folder is usually located  
inside one of the following folders:  
Modify phone functions, such as  
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID  
C:\Program Files\Palm  
\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\  
C:\Program Files\Handspring\  
Replace organizer features, such as  
Contacts or Calendar  
U P G R A D I N G  
201  
                         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
4
To help you identify the app that is  
2
3
Select your user folder and Option-drag  
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy  
of that folder.  
causing the problem, move one app at a  
time from the Old_Apps folder to the  
Backup folder, and then sync.  
Confirm that your copy includes the  
Backup subfolder and that all the files in  
the original Backup subfolder are also in  
the copy of the Backup subfolder.  
If the problem recurs, delete the last  
app you installed and report the  
problem to its developer.  
4
5
Delete all files from the original Backup  
subfolder.  
5
Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in  
the Old_Apps folder.  
Perform a hard reset on your Treo 755P  
smartphone for instructions.  
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps  
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup  
folder, or determining which files to move,  
try reinstalling the app using the original  
third-party developer files.  
6
7
Sync your new smartphone with your  
new desktop software and be sure to  
select your existing device name from  
the User list.  
TIP Need more info on the Backup folder? See  
To help you identify the app that is  
causing the problem, move one  
third-party app from the copy of the  
Backup subfolder to the original Backup  
subfolder, and then sync.  
MAC ONLY  
1
Locate your user folder on your  
If the problem recurs, delete the last  
app you installed and report the  
problem to its developer.  
computer.  
NOTE Your user folder name is the same  
as your device name and is usually found in  
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :  
<your Mac username> : Documents : Palm  
: Users  
8
Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party  
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.  
U P G R A D I N G  
202  
           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Follow these steps to retry the installation:  
Desktop software  
installation  
1
Make sure your computer profile  
includes administrator rights to install  
software. In large organizations, these  
are usually granted by the system  
administrator.  
If you are having trouble installing the  
desktop software, you may have the wrong  
version of the software or some of your  
computers resources may be unavailable.  
2
3
Restart your computer.  
Quit any active applications, including  
virus scanners and Internet security  
applications.  
Windows Vista users: Before inserting  
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to  
you’ll find instructions and information  
about using your smartphone and desktop  
software with Windows Vista.  
4
Make sure you’re installing the software  
from the Palm Software Installation CD  
that came with your new smartphone.  
Other versions of the desktop software  
may not work with this Treo  
smartphone.  
TIP The Palm Software Installation CD installs  
software that lets you synchronize using  
Palm® Desktop software (included) or  
Microsoft® Outlook® for Windows (sold  
separately). If you want to synchronize using a  
different personal information manager (PIM),  
you must install a third-party solution. Contact  
the PIM’s vendor to learn if software is  
available for your smartphone.  
5
Insert the Palm Software Installation CD  
to restart the installation.  
IMPORTANT Always use the same  
language for your Treo smartphone, your  
operating system, and your desktop  
software. Otherwise, you may lose  
information or have difficulty with  
synchronization. Support is not provided for  
mismatched language setups.  
D E S K T O P S O F T W A R E I N S T A L L A T I O N  
203  
               
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
loading any system extras. If your  
Resetting your  
smartphone  
smartphone loops or freezes during or after  
a soft reset, a system reset may help.  
Performing a system reset can release your  
smartphone from an endless loop so that  
you can uninstall a third-party application  
that may be causing the looping.  
Performing a soft reset  
A soft reset is similar to restarting a  
computer. If your smartphone is not  
responding or you have trouble  
synchronizing with your computer, a soft  
reset may help. All your info is retained  
when you perform a soft reset.  
1
Remove the battery from your  
smartphone.  
2
Press and hold Up  
while reinserting  
the battery.  
1
Remove the battery from your  
smartphone, and then reinsert it.  
3
4
5
When Date & Time Preferences  
Don’t know how? See Replacing the  
appears, release Up  
.
Delete the third-party application that  
you suspect is causing the problem.  
NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert  
the battery.  
Perform a soft reset. The wireless  
features of your smartphone are not  
available until you complete this step.  
2
At the end of the soft reset, Date &  
Time Preferences appears. Select  
Done.  
Performing a hard reset  
A hard reset erases all information and  
third-party software on your Treo  
smartphone. Never perform a hard reset  
without first trying a soft reset and a  
system reset and trying to resolve  
Performing a system reset  
A system reset, also called a safe or warm  
reset, tells your smartphone to stop what  
its doing and start over again without  
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
204  
                           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
third-party software issues. (See  
3
4
When the Access Powered logo  
appears, release Power/End  
Third-party applications for suggestions on  
diagnosing third-party software issues.)  
After performing a hard reset, you can  
restore previously synchronized  
.
When the Erase all data? prompt  
appears, press Up  
to confirm the  
hard reset.  
information the next time you sync.  
IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in  
IMPORTANT If you set a password on  
your smartphone, performing a hard reset  
reformats your smartphone. This is a more  
severe form of a hard reset, which  
progress message appears, do not touch  
your smartphone until the process is  
complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.  
removes all your information, and restores  
your formats, preferences, and other  
settings to the factory default settings.  
5
When the language selection screen  
appears, select the same language you  
selected for your desktop software.  
IMPORTANT Always use the same  
language for your Treo smartphone, your  
operating system, and your desktop  
software. Otherwise, you may lose  
information or have difficulty with  
synchronization. Support is not provided for  
mismatched language setups.  
TIP Some third-party applications do not  
create a backup on your computer when you  
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you  
may lose data in these applications and you  
will need to reinstall the application after the  
hard reset. Please contact the applications  
developer to find out which data is backed up  
during synchronization.  
6
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
align the screen and set the date and  
time.  
1
2
Remove the battery from your device.  
Press and hold Power/End  
reinserting the battery. See Replacing  
while  
7
(Optional) If you want to confirm that  
the hard reset was successful, press  
Applications  
and select  
R E S E T T I N G Y O U R S M A R T P H O N E  
205  
           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
HotSync  
. If you see your device  
name in the upper-right corner, the hard  
reset was not successful.  
Replacing the battery  
Your Treo 755P smartphone comes with a  
replaceable battery. Be sure to use a  
replacement battery that is recommended  
or sold by Palm and is compatible with the  
Treo 755P smartphone. Failure to use the  
proper battery may result in a risk of  
personal injury or product damage, and it  
voids your smartphone warranty.  
Battery door  
release  
3
4
Place a finger in the notch next to the  
battery, and lift up the old battery at a  
45-degree angle to remove it from the  
compartment.  
1
Press Power/End  
to turn off the  
Align the metal contacts on the new  
battery with the contacts inside the  
battery compartment.  
screen.  
2
Press the battery door release, and  
slide the battery door downward  
to remove it from your smartphone.  
R E P L A C I N G T H E B A T T E R Y  
206  
   
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Battery  
contacts  
Screen  
Smartphone  
contacts  
The screen appears blank  
1
When a call lasts longer than the limit  
specified in Power Preferences, the  
screen dims automatically. In certain  
lighting conditions, the screen may  
appear blank when this occurs.  
Press any key except Power/End to  
restore the screen to normal brightness.  
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.  
Notch  
5
Insert the new battery into the  
compartment at a 45-degree angle,  
pressing it into place. Slide the battery  
door onto the back of the smartphone  
until it clicks into place.  
2
3
When a period of inactivity lasts longer  
than the limit specified in Power  
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press  
and release Power/End  
to  
wake up the screen.  
6
7
Connect your smartphone to the  
charger or sync cable.  
Look closely at the screen. If you can  
see a dim image, try adjusting the  
Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn  
on, and then enable the network time or  
set the date and time when prompted.  
4
5
If the screen is still blank, perform a soft  
TIP Be sure to dispose of your old battery  
properly. In some areas, disposal in household  
or business trash is prohibited.  
If the problem persists, connect your  
smartphone to the charger (see  
Charging the battery) and perform a soft  
reset again.  
S C R E E N  
207  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
6
If that doesn’t work, perform a hard  
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left  
corner  
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of  
the screen is the Alert screen symbol. It  
appears when you have alarms or  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
messages that you haven’t acknowledged.  
1
Press and hold Center  
blinking bell with your stylus.  
or tap the  
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to  
taps or it activates wrong features  
2
When the list of pending alerts appears,  
do either of the following:  
1
2
3
Press Applications  
and use the  
5-way  
to select Prefs .  
Select the alert text to view the item  
and keep it in the list.  
Use the 5-way  
Touchscreen.  
to select  
Check the box next to an alert to clear  
it from the list, and then select Done.  
Follow the onscreen instructions to  
align the screen.  
4
5
Select Done.  
If the problem persists, check for dirt  
between the screen and the edge of the  
smartphone.  
Synchronization  
Synchronization backs up the information  
from your smartphone onto your computer  
and vice versa. If you ever need to perform  
a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all  
your information on your smartphone, you  
can synchronize your smartphone with  
your computer to restore the info. Similarly,  
if your computer crashes and your  
6
If you’re using a screen protector, make  
sure that it is properly installed.  
Palm Desktop info is damaged, you can  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
208  
                     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
recover your info by synchronizing with  
name consists of the first six characters of  
your smartphone. To make sure you always the second word of your device name  
have an up-to-date backup of your info,  
synchronize frequently.  
followed by the first letter of the first word.  
For example, if your device name is John  
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.  
Your user folder is usually located inside  
one of the following folders:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\  
C:\Program Files\palmOne\  
C:\Program Files\Handspring\  
This section describes synchronization  
between your Treo smartphone and a  
desktop computer running Palm Desktop  
software. You can also synchronize the  
information on your smartphone using  
third-party applications. See the separate  
documentation for the third-party  
application for information on features and  
configuration.  
MAC ONLY Your user folder name is the  
same as your device name and is usually  
found in this location: Mac hard drive :  
Users : Your Mac username : Documents  
: Palm : Users.  
Before you attempt to synchronize, make  
sure you’ve installed the desktop  
synchronization software from the Palm  
Software Installation CD.  
What is the backup folder?  
The Backup folder is located inside your  
During synchronization, HotSync® manager  
puts a copy of most of your info and  
applications into the Backup folder. (Some  
third-party apps do not put a copy into the  
Backup folder.) The next time you sync,  
HotSync manager compares the contents  
of the Backup folder to the contents of your  
smartphone and then restores any missing  
info or applications.  
TIP Every device needs a unique name. Never  
synchronize more than one device to the  
same device name on your computer.  
I can’t find my user folder  
WINDOWS ONLY If your device name is  
one word, your user folder name is the first  
six characters of your device name. If your  
device name is two words, your user folder  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
209  
             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
If an app that you deleted reappears on  
your smartphone, try deleting the app from  
your Backup folder.  
Programs, select Palm, and then select  
HotSync Manager.  
HotSync  
manager icon  
Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync  
attempt  
1
Make sure that the USB sync cable is  
securely connected to the USB port on  
your computer and on the bottom of  
your smartphone (see Synchronizing  
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac  
hard drive. Double-click HotSync  
manager  
in the Palm folder. In the  
TIP If you’re having trouble trying to sync  
using an IR or Bluetooth® connection, try  
using the USB sync cable instead. If this  
solves the problem, check your IR or  
Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing  
Connection Settings panel, set the  
Local Setup port to Palm USB.  
3
Synchronize. If the synchronization is  
successful, you do not need to  
complete the remaining steps.  
4
5
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
2
Make sure that HotSync manager is  
running:  
Synchronize. If the synchronization is  
successful, you do not need to  
complete the remaining steps.  
Windows: Right-click HotSync  
manager  
in the taskbar in the  
lower-right corner of your computer  
screen, and make sure that Local USB  
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync  
manager icon, click Start, select  
6
If problems persist and you’re  
synchronizing through a USB hub, try  
connecting the sync cable to a different  
USB port or directly to your computer’s  
built-in USB port.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
210  
             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
7
8
Reboot your computer.  
Synchronization starts but stops without  
finishing  
Synchronize. If the synchronization is  
successful, you do not need to  
complete the remaining steps.  
TIP The HotSync Log can give you information  
about your most recent synchronization.  
9
Do one of the following:  
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager  
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of  
your computer screen, and then select View  
Log.  
Windows: Uninstall Palm software.  
Click Start, select Settings, select  
Control Panel, select Add or Remove  
Programs, select Palm Desktop  
software, and then click Change/  
Remove.  
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the  
HotSync menu, select View Log.  
®
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS  
device or received a system error, such as  
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with  
software on your smartphone.  
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the  
problem persists after completing  
step 7. Mac computers do not provide  
an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop  
software.  
1
Locate your Backup subfolder and  
rename the folder (for example,  
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the  
following locations might be  
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on  
the device you’re upgrading from:  
10 Reboot your computer.  
11 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone.  
Windows:  
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name  
Mac:  
Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\  
device name  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
211  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
2
3
Synchronize.  
Palm Desktop software, and then click  
Change/Remove.  
If the problem is resolved, begin  
reinstalling your third-party applications  
one at a time by double-clicking a single  
file in the original Backup subfolder that  
you renamed, and sync after each  
application you install. If the problem  
recurs, delete the last application you  
installed and report the problem to its  
developer.  
6
7
Reboot your computer.  
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone.  
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t  
appear where it should  
1
Make sure you’re synchronizing with  
the intended desktop personal  
4
Do one of the following:  
Windows: If the Windows New  
Hardware Wizard appears, the  
synchronization process may be timing  
out before the wizard completes its job.  
Follow all instructions in the New  
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.  
information manager (PIM). The Palm  
Software Installation CD enables you to  
choose to synchronize with  
Palm Desktop software (included) or  
Microsoft Outlook for Windows (sold  
separately). Reinsert the installation CD  
and select Change your  
synchronization method if necessary.  
If you use a different PIM, you need to  
install third-party software to  
synchronize. For more info, consult the  
company that makes the PIM.  
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the  
problem persists after completing  
step 3. Mac computers do not provide  
an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop  
software.  
5
(Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop  
software. Click Start, select Settings,  
select Control Panel, select Add or  
Remove Programs, select  
2
If multiple Palm OS devices are  
synchronizing with your computer,  
make sure you are synchronizing with  
the correct device name. If info is not  
appearing in Palm Desktop software,  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
212  
     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
make sure the correct device name is  
selected in the User list on the toolbar  
of Palm Desktop software.  
TIP Outlook subfolders and public folders are  
not accessible with the included software.  
You may want to use a third-party solution  
instead.  
3
4
Open HotSync manager on your  
computer, and make sure the necessary  
conduits are set to Synchronize the  
files.  
TIP (Outlook only) If you want to sync your  
info with a global Exchange Address Book,  
you must copy the addresses to your local  
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the  
addresses and select Add to Personal  
Address Book).  
Do one of the following:  
Windows: Uninstall Palm Desktop  
software. Click Start, select Settings,  
select Control Panel, select Add or  
Remove Programs, select  
Palm Desktop software, and then click  
Change/Remove.  
TIP For more info on Outlook conduits,  
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the  
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with  
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.  
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft  
Outlook after I sync  
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the  
problem persists after completing  
step 3. Mac computers do not provide  
an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop  
software.  
1
Open Microsoft Outlook (sold  
separately) and delete the duplicate  
entries.  
2
On your computer, go to the Outlook  
application with duplicate entries and  
manually enter any info you added to  
your smartphone since the last time  
you synchronized.  
5
6
Reboot your computer.  
Reinstall Palm Desktop software from  
the Palm Software Installation CD that  
came with your smartphone.  
7
(Outlook only) If you’re trying to  
synchronize offline, set your Outlook  
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to  
be available offline.  
3
Right-click HotSync manager  
in the  
taskbar, and select Custom.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
213  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
4
Select the application that has duplicate If you’re using Microsoft Outlook (sold  
entries and also has Outlook in its  
separately):  
name, such as Outlook contacts.  
1
Make sure that you installed the  
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came  
with your Treo 755P smartphone. If  
you’re not sure whether this software is  
installed, reinstall Palm Desktop  
software from the Palm Software  
Installation CD that came with your  
smartphone.  
5
6
Click Change.  
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,  
and then click OK.  
7
If more than one Outlook application  
has duplicate entries, repeat steps 4  
through 6 for each application with  
duplicates.  
2
3
Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the  
wrong entries.  
8
9
Click Done.  
Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
On your computer, manually enter any  
Calendar info you added to your  
smartphone since the last time  
you synchronized.  
My appointments show up in the wrong  
time slot after I sync  
4
5
Click HotSync manager  
taskbar and select Custom.  
in the  
If you create an appointment in the wrong  
time zone (that is, your desktop was set to  
the wrong time zone), it shows up in the  
wrong time zone on your smartphone. To  
be safe, enable local network time and  
avoid assigning time zones to your  
appointments.  
Select an application that has both  
Calendar and Outlook in its name.  
6
7
Click Change.  
Select Desktop overwrites handheld,  
and then click OK.  
8
Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
214  
     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
9
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the  
Calendar Change HotSync Action  
dialog box.  
7
Click HotSync manager  
taskbar and select Custom.  
in the  
8
9
Select Calendar.  
10 Select Synchronize the files, and then  
Click Change.  
click OK.  
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,  
You should now be able to assign time  
zones to your events without encountering  
this problem.  
and then click OK.  
11 Synchronize your smartphone and your  
computer.  
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:  
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the  
Calendar Change HotSync Action  
dialog box.  
1
On your smartphone, press  
Calendar  
.
13 Select Synchronize the files, and then  
2
3
Press Menu  
.
click OK.  
Select Options, and then select  
Preferences.  
You should now be able to assign time  
zones to your events without encountering  
this problem.  
4
5
6
Uncheck the New events use time  
zones box (if its checked).  
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the  
future, do not assign time zones to your  
events. Palm Desktop software does not  
support time zones.  
On your computer, open Palm Desktop  
software and correct the wrong entries.  
On your computer, manually enter any  
Calendar info you added to your  
smartphone since the last time  
you synchronized.  
S Y N C H R O N I Z A T I O N  
215  
   
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
My smartphone won’t connect to the  
mobile network  
Phone  
1
Contact your wireless service provider  
to confirm that you have an active data  
plan.  
Signal strength is weak  
Become familiar with low coverage areas  
where you live, commute, work, and play.  
Then you will know when to expect signal  
strength issues. You can check signal  
strength by looking at the signal-strength  
icon in the title bar of the Phone  
applications Main View. The stronger the  
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are  
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.  
2
Try the suggestions about signal  
strength described in Signal strength is  
weak.  
3
4
Turn off your phone and turn it on again  
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
1
2
3
4
5
If you’re standing, move about ten feet  
in any direction.  
The other person hears an echo  
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo  
smartphone to avoid coupling or  
feedback on the other persons end.  
This applies to both the speakerphone  
and the earpiece.  
If you’re in a building, move near a  
window. Open any metal blinds.  
If you’re in a building, move outdoors or  
to a more open area.  
Position the earpiece closer to your ear  
to prevent sound leaking back to the  
microphone. Keep your hand away from  
the microphone hole, which is on the  
bottom right side of the smartphone.  
If you’re outdoors, move away from  
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.  
If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo  
smartphone so that it’s level with a  
window of your vehicle.  
If you’re using the speakerphone  
feature with your smartphone lying on a  
P H O N E  
216  
                     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
flat surface, try turning the smartphone  
face down (screen facing the surface).  
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free  
device, try the following:  
Move your smartphone closer to the  
hands-free device. Audio quality  
degrades as the distance between your  
smartphone and hands-free device  
increases. The effective range for a  
device varies between manufacturers.  
I hear my own voice echo  
Ask the person on the other end of the call  
to turn down the volume on his or her  
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or  
her ear.  
Confirm that no obstructions, including  
your body, are between the smartphone  
and your hands-free device.  
My voice is too quiet on the other end  
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo  
smartphone, or the hands-free  
microphone, close to your mouth.  
TIP For best performance, keep your  
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same  
side of your body.  
Check the signal-strength  
icon in  
the title bar of the Phone applications  
Main View. If the signal is weak (few  
bars are displayed), try the suggestions My smartphone hangs up when I hold it  
about signal strength described in  
to my ear  
You may be accidentally pressing the  
onscreen Hang Up All button with your  
cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that  
your face doesn’t press against the screen.  
If this is not convenient, you may want to  
disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature  
I hear static or interference  
Check the signal-strength  
title bar of the Phone applications Main  
View. If the signal is weak (few bars are  
icon in the  
displayed), try the suggestions about signal during active calls (see Locking your  
strength described in Signal strength is  
weak.  
screen).  
P H O N E  
217  
         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
My phone seems to turn off by itself  
The voicemail icon stays on the screen  
after I listen to my messages  
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo  
smartphone automatically turns the phone  
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar  
on if it was on before the reset. However, if after you listen to your messages, you can  
the smartphone can’t determine if your  
phone was on before the reset, the phone  
does not automatically turn on (see Turning  
your phone on and off). If the problem  
persists and you’re using third-party  
for additional suggestions.  
manually clear the voicemail icon.  
1
2
3
In the Phone application, press  
Menu  
.
Select Options and then select Phone  
Preferences.  
Select Clear Voicemail Icon.  
My smartphone makes or answers calls  
when it’s in a bag or pocket  
Hands-free devices  
Items in your bag or pocket may be  
pressing the onscreen Answer button or  
otherwise activating screen items. If this  
happens, be sure to press Power/End  
to turn off the screen before placing  
your smartphone in a bag or pocket. You  
may also want to disable the screens  
touch-sensitive feature during incoming  
TIP Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet/10 meters  
in optimum environmental conditions.  
Performance and range may be affected by  
physical obstacles, radio interference from  
nearby electronic equipment, and other  
factors.  
prevent your smartphone from making  
calls, as well as other useful accessories,  
visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S  
218  
             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
I can’t make or receive calls using a  
Bluetooth hands-free device  
I hear static or interference when using  
my Bluetooth hands-free device  
Confirm all the following:  
Try moving your Treo smartphone closer  
to the hands-free device. Audio quality  
degrades as the distance between your  
smartphone and hands-free device  
increases. The effective range for a  
device varies between manufacturers.  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ for a list  
of compatible devices.  
The Bluetooth setting is on when you  
Confirm that no obstructions, including  
your body, are between the smartphone  
and your hands-free device.  
press Applications  
Bluetooth  
and select  
.
You have already formed a partnership  
between your smartphone and your  
hands-free device, and the hands-free  
device appears in the Trusted Devices  
If the problem persists, turn the  
Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it  
back On again. If it still persists, create a  
new partnership with the hands-free  
Your hands-free device is charged and  
turned on.  
TIP For best performance, keep your  
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same  
side of your body.  
Your Treo smartphone is within range of  
the hands-free device.  
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth  
setting Off and then turn it On again. If it  
still persists, create a new partnership with  
the hands-free device (see Connecting to a  
Some features of my Bluetooth  
hands-free device don’t work with my  
smartphone  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ to ensure  
that your device is compatible.  
H A N D S - F R E E D E V I C E S  
219  
     
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Check the documentation that came  
Delays can occur also between the time  
that a message is sent and the time it is  
received.  
with your device or the manufacturers  
website for information specific to  
your device.  
Verify with the recipient that the  
receiving device can handle text  
messages.  
Email  
If a text message arrives but does not  
display an alert, perform a soft reset  
For troubleshooting info on the VersaMail®  
application, see the User Guide for the  
VersaMail® Application at  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
Web  
I can’t tell if data services are available  
Messaging  
When your phone is on, icons appear in the  
title bar in the Phone application’s Main  
View to indicate whether data services are  
available and whether a data connection is  
descriptions of the icons that indicate that  
data services are available.  
I can’t send or receive text messages  
Make sure your phone is turned on (see  
Contact your wireless service provider  
to verify that your plan includes text  
messaging services, that these services  
have been correctly activated, and that  
they are available at your location. Your  
wireless service provider should be able  
to tell you if messaging services have  
been experiencing transmission delays.  
TIP If your phone is on and you do not see any  
of the data icons, data services are not  
available in your current location.  
E M A I L  
220  
                         
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
My smartphone won’t connect to the  
Internet  
7
8
9
If the connection is successful, go to  
the web browser. If you still can’t make  
a connection, perform a soft reset (see  
Your Treo 755P smartphone supports the  
1xRTT and EVDO wireless data networks.  
To connect to the Internet, you must  
subscribe to and activate data services  
with your wireless service provider, and  
you must be in a location with data  
coverage.  
If your phone did not turn on  
automatically, press and hold Power/  
End  
to turn on your phone, and  
try connecting to the Internet.  
Contact your wireless service provider  
to verify the following:  
1
2
3
Press and hold Power/End  
turn off your phone. Then press  
and hold the same button to turn it back  
on again.  
to  
Your subscription plan includes  
high-speed data services.  
Data services have been activated on  
your account.  
Press Phone  
the 1xRTT  
and look for either  
or EVDO icon in the  
Data coverage is available in your  
location.  
title bar of the Phone application’s Main  
View.  
There are no data service outages in  
your location.  
If you see one of these icons, you are in  
a data coverage area. Try connecting to  
the Internet again. If you do not see  
either of these icons, press  
I can’t access a web page  
First, make sure you have Internet access:  
Open the web browser and try to view  
another web page you’ve loaded before. To  
ensure you’re viewing the page directly  
Applications  
, select Prefs  
,
and continue with the following steps.  
4
5
Select Network.  
Select the Services pick list and select  
from the Internet, press Menu  
, select  
EVDO.  
Go, and then select Refresh.  
6
Select Connect.  
WE B  
221  
                 
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
If you can view the other web page after  
you refresh it but you still can’t access the  
page you were originally trying to view, the  
page may contain elements that are not  
supported by the web browser. These  
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,  
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.  
1
2
Press Phone  
the 1xRTT  
title bar of the Phone applications Main  
View.  
and look for either  
or EVDO icon in the  
If you see the EVDO  
icon, there may  
be a problem with the website you are  
trying to access. Try opening a different  
web page to see if the problem  
persists.  
Some websites use a redirector to their  
true home page. If the web browser on  
your smartphone can’t follow the  
redirector, try using a desktop browser to  
see the landing page of the redirector, and  
then enter that address in the web browser  
on your smartphone.  
3
4
If you see the 1xRTT  
icon, you may  
be experiencing the difference in  
performance between the two types of  
data networks.  
To be sure there is not a problem with  
your connection to your wireless  
TIP Your Treo smartphone can open your email  
application when you select an email address  
on a web page. If nothing happens when you  
select the link, make sure your email  
application is already set up.  
service providers network, press and  
hold Power/End  
to turn off your  
phone. Then press and hold the same  
button to turn it back on again.  
5
Try opening the web page again to see  
if it loads faster.  
It takes a long time for a web page to load  
If it is taking longer than usual to load web  
pages, you may have traveled from an  
EVDO service area to a 1xRTT service area.  
Although 1xRTT data service is considered  
a high-speed data service, it seems slow if  
you are used to EVDO speed.  
An image or map is too small on  
my screen  
The web browser has two modes:  
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized  
Mode resizes all images and page  
elements to fit in a single column on the  
W E B  
222  
               
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page  
Mode to see the full-size image (see  
Hold the smartphone as still as  
possible. Try supporting your  
picture-taking arm against your body or  
a stationary object (such as a wall).  
You may also be able to save the image on  
your smartphone or on an expansion card  
and then view the image later on your  
computer.  
Keep the subject of the picture still.  
Exposure time is longer with lower light  
levels, so you may see a blur.  
For best results, verify that you have the  
brightest light source coming from  
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.  
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the  
subject in front of a window or light.  
A secure site refuses to permit a  
transaction  
Some websites don’t support certain  
browsers for transactions. Please contact  
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site  
allows transactions using your  
Make sure the subject is at least 18  
inches away from the camera to ensure  
good focus.  
smartphones Blazer® web browser.  
When you synchronize your smartphone  
with your computer, your camera images  
are stored on your hard drive (see Viewing  
Camera  
Here are some tips for taking good pictures  
with the built-in camera:  
Clean the cameras lens with a soft,  
lint-free cloth.  
Take pictures in bright lighting  
conditions. Low-light images may be  
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the  
camera.  
C A M E R A  
223  
             
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
Application at  
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.  
Making room on your  
Treosmartphone  
Pics&Videos: Large images take up a  
lot of memory. Move images to an  
expansion card or synchronize them to  
your computer, and then delete the  
images from your smartphone (see  
video).  
Keep in mind that your smartphone  
includes an expansion card slot, and that  
you can store applications and information  
on expansion cards (sold separately).  
However, you still need free memory on  
the smartphone itself to run applications  
from an expansion card. For more info on  
using expansion cards, see Using  
Music: Music files often consume  
excessive memory. Move music files to  
an expansion card, or delete large files  
from your smartphone (see Transferring  
If you store a large number of records or  
install many third-party applications, the  
internal memory on your smartphone may  
fill up. Here are some common ways to  
clear space:  
Internet: If you set a large web browser  
cache, you may want to use the web  
browsers advanced Memory  
Management settings to clear all recent  
Email: Messages that have large  
attachments can quickly consume  
memory on your smartphone. Delete  
messages with large attachments. If  
you have hundreds of messages with or  
without attachments, you may want to  
delete older messages to make room  
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail®  
Third-party applications: You can  
delete infrequently used applications  
M A K I N G R O O M O N Y O U R T R E O S M A R T P H O N E  
224  
                                   
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
4
5
If the problem persists, perform another  
system reset.  
Third-party  
applications  
If possible, synchronize your  
smartphone with your computer to back  
up your most recent info.  
Some third-party applications can cause  
conflicts on your smartphone. For example,  
third-party applications that were not  
written with the Treo smartphone keyboard  
and 5-way navigator in mind may cause  
errors or strange behavior when you use  
the keyboard and 5-way navigator in these  
applications. Third-party applications that  
modify wireless features may require extra  
troubleshooting.  
6
If you’re unable to perform the  
preceding steps or the problem  
persists, locate your Backup subfolder  
on your computer and rename the  
folder (for example, BackupOld). Note  
that “Palm” in the following locations  
might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”  
based on the device you’re upgrading  
from:  
WINDOWS ONLY C:\Program  
Files\Palm\device name  
If you recently installed an application and  
your device seems to be stuck, try the  
following:  
MAC ONLY Mac  
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device  
name  
1
Perform a soft reset (see Performing a  
7
2
If the problem persists, perform a  
reset).  
8
Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts,  
Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos info.  
3
Delete the most recently installed  
application from your smartphone (see  
T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S  
225  
           
C O M M O N Q U E S T I O N S  
11  
9
Do one of the following:  
encounters a system error, it automatically  
resets itself and resumes functioning as  
normal. If possible, it even turns the phone  
back on if it was on before the error  
occurred.  
If the problem is resolved, begin  
reinstalling your third-party  
applications one at a time by  
double-clicking a single file in the  
original Backup subfolder that you  
renamed, and sync after each  
application you install.  
Sometimes you might want to know more  
about an error. Your Treo smartphone uses  
a special interface to show error messages  
in greater detail.  
If the problem recurs, delete the last  
application you installed and report  
the problem to its developer.  
1
2
Press Phone  
.
Enter # #377, and then press Send  
*
.
Getting more help  
3
Review the screen with details about  
the conditions that led up to the most  
recent automatic reset.  
Contact the author or vendor of the  
third-party software if you require further  
assistance.  
4
Select OK.  
Note that third-party developers create  
their own error messages. If you do not  
understand an error message, please  
contact the developer of the application for  
help.  
Error messages  
Your Treo smartphone is designed to  
minimize interruptions when a system  
error occurs. If your smartphone  
E R R O R M E S S A G E S  
226  
             
Beam  
Terms  
The process of sending or receiving an  
entry or application using the infrared port  
on your Treo smartphone.  
1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio  
transmission technology)  
®
Bluetooth wireless technology  
A wireless technology that provides fast  
data transfer and Internet access with  
average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts  
of up to 144Kbps.  
Technology that enables devices such as  
smartphones, mobile phones, and  
computers to connect wirelessly to each  
other so that they can exchange  
Alt (alternative)  
information over short distances.  
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the  
Device name  
keyboard, and then press Alt  
to access  
The name associated with your Treo 755P  
smartphone that distinguishes it from  
other Palm OS® devices. When you first  
synchronize your smartphone, you are  
asked to give it a device name. This name  
appears in the User list in Palm® Desktop  
software.  
variations such as international characters  
and symbols.  
Applications  
The screen on your Palm® Treo755P  
smartphone from which you can open all  
applications.  
Dialog box  
Auto-off interval  
A set of options and command buttons that  
is enclosed by a border and that enables  
you to carry out a specific task.  
The time of inactivity that passes before  
the screen on your smartphone turns off.  
The wireless features on your smartphone  
are unaffected by this setting.  
T E RMS  
227  
                     
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized)  
information to other IR devices within a  
short radius.  
A wireless broadband technology that is  
designed for very high speed data transfer  
with average download speeds of 400 to  
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching  
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and  
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps.  
Lithium ion (Li-ion)  
The rechargeable battery technology used  
in Treo smartphones.  
Option key  
The keyboard button that enables you to  
access the alternative feature that appears  
above the letter on each key.  
Favorite  
A button that provides quick access to a  
phone number (speed dial) or commonly  
used application (such as Contacts, Web,  
or Messaging). You can define up to 70  
favorite buttons in the Phone application.  
Palm® Desktop software  
A PIM application for computers that helps  
you manage your personal information and  
keep your personal information  
HotSync® manager  
synchronized with your Treo smartphone.  
The computer application that manages the  
synchronization of your Treo smartphone  
with your computer.  
Palm OS® software  
The operating system of your Treo 755P  
smartphone, which is known for its  
simplicity of use and for the large number  
of compatible third-party applications that  
can be added to your Treo 755P  
smartphone.  
HotSync technology  
The technology that synchronizes your  
smartphone and your computer with the  
simple press of a button.  
Infrared (IR)  
A way of transmitting information using  
light waves. The IR port on your  
smartphone enables you to transfer  
T E R M S  
228  
                 
Palm® Quick Install  
generally store contacts, schedules, tasks,  
and memos.  
The component on your Windows  
computer that enables you to install Palm  
OS applications and other information on  
your Treo smartphone.  
SMS (Short Messaging Service)  
The service that exchanges short text  
messages almost instantly. Text messages  
are typically exchanged between mobile  
phones. These messages can usually  
include up to 160 characters; messages  
with more than 160 characters are  
automatically split into several messages.  
Treo smartphones can send and receive  
SMS messages while you are on a voice  
call.  
Partnership  
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your  
smartphone and a hands-free device—that  
can connect because each device finds the  
same passkey on the other device. Once  
you form a partnership with a device, you  
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect  
with that device. Partnership is also known  
as paired relationship, pairing, trusted  
Streaming  
device, and trusted pair on some devices.  
Technology that enables you to access  
media content—for example, watch a  
video or listen to an audio program—  
directly from the Internet on your  
smartphone without needing to download  
a file to save on your smartphone.  
Phone  
The application on your Treo smartphone  
that enables you to make and receive  
phone calls.  
PIM (personal information manager)  
User folder  
A genre of software that includes  
The folder on your computer that contains  
the information you enter in Palm Desktop  
software and the information you enter on  
your smartphone and synchronize with  
Palm Desktop software.  
applications such as Palm Desktop  
software, Microsoft® Outlook®, Lotus  
Notes, ACT!, and the Palm OS organizer  
applications on your smartphone. PIMs  
T E RMS  
229  
                     
T E R M S  
230  
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and  
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body  
and the unit.  
Important safety and  
legal information  
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact  
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will  
likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/  
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.  
FCC Notice  
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo755P  
smartphone, by Palm are:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits  
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment  
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause  
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If  
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
Maximum SAR  
Values  
Cellular  
PCS  
Held to Ear  
1.07 (W/1Kg)  
0.89 (W/1Kg)  
1.46 (W/1Kg)  
0.33 (W/1Kg)  
Body - Worn  
FCC Radiofrequency Emission  
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission  
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as:  
FCC ID number: O8F-895.  
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the  
following FCC Website:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treo smartphone is compliant  
with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For  
additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product,  
please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC.  
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications  
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna  
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate  
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the  
user's authority to operate the equipment.  
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices  
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such  
an occurrence.  
FCC RF Safety Statement  
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused  
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To  
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than  
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing  
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users  
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.  
A Palmbrand body-worn accessory that has been tested for  
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N  
231  
       
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—  
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little  
shock discharges the built-up static electricity.  
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect  
electronic devices.  
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge  
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD  
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your  
electronic equipment against ESD.  
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm  
circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to  
®
help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm device,  
from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its  
products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could  
build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic  
device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything  
from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD.  
Devices that you carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up  
ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built  
up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when  
the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a  
discharge event can occur.  
Battery safety information  
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or  
shred.  
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects  
into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,  
expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.  
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.  
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been  
qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified  
battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage,  
or other hazard.  
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static  
electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching  
an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The  
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before  
connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a  
cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many  
ways, including the following:  
Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects  
to contact battery terminals.  
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been  
qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x.  
Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,  
leakage or other hazard.  
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by  
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.  
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged  
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case  
should discharge the ESD on your body.  
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local  
regulations.  
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.  
Battery usage by children should be supervised.  
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.  
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is  
dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects  
damage, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can  
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment  
include the following:  
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other  
hazard.  
Low relative humidity.  
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For  
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural  
fibers like cotton.)  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N  
232  
 
matérialisation de barrettes. 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de  
bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas  
toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les  
parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout  
simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau.  
Precaution against hearing loss  
Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long  
period of time can damage your hearing.  
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut  
endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web  
www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.  
Mesures touchant à la sécurité: Dans certains lieux ou situations,  
tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages  
professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif  
de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à  
chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela  
est requis.  
Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes  
porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques,  
pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs.) doivent conserver une  
distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du  
côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.  
Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile  
Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit dAbsorption Spécifique) de votre Treo 755P  
smartphone est 0,896 w/kg  
Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont  
pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente  
potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée  
par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne  
jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation  
d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.  
Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux  
rayonnements: Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons  
(oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du  
téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort  
d’utilisation.  
(1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour  
une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS,  
exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes  
électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à  
la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci  
soit inférieur à 2w/kg.  
Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que  
le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les  
adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.  
Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de  
réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N  
233  
I M P O R T A N T S A F E T Y A N D L E G A L I N F O R M A T I O N  
234  
Specifications  
Radio  
CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and  
1400MHz (GPS)  
EVDO and 1xRTT  
Phone features  
Speakerphone  
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3- or 4-barrel connector)  
Microphone mute option  
TTY/TDD compatible  
3-way calling  
®
Processor  
technology  
Intel XScale processor, 312MHz  
Expansion  
Battery  
miniSD card slot  
Rechargeable lithium ion  
Removable for replacement  
3.5 hours full charge time  
Palm OS® version  
Camera  
Palm OS 5.4.9  
Still-image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel  
2x digital zoom  
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)  
Automatic light balance  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
235  
   
Size  
4.4 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in./112mm x 58mm x 22.5mm with  
antenna  
Weight  
5.6 ounces (160 grams)  
Connectivity  
IR  
®
Bluetooth wireless technology (1.2 compliant)  
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)  
65,536 colors (16-bit color)  
Display  
User-adjustable brightness  
Keyboard  
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator  
Backlight for low lighting conditions  
Included software  
Phone (including Palm OS®  
Favorites, Dial Pad)  
My Treo® software  
Contacts  
Memos  
Tasks  
Pics&Videos (includes  
camera and camcorder)  
Voice Memo  
Documents To Go®  
Messaging (text)  
Web browser (Internet)  
Pocket Tunes™  
Calendar  
Calculator Basic and  
Advanced  
World Clock  
Palm® Desktop software and  
®
HotSync manager  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
236  
System  
requirements  
Windows 2000 or XP with USB port  
Mac OS 10.2–10.3 with USB port  
Later versions may also be supported  
32°F to 104°F/0°C to 40°C  
Operating and  
storage  
temperature range  
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
237  
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S  
238  
alternate characters 31  
application menus 28  
applications 34, 48  
calculator 158  
corporate mail servers and  
forwarding calls and 51  
getting support for 3  
setting preferences for 84  
voicemail and 44  
Accounts command 84  
Acrobat file formats 149  
activating  
items on screen 27  
smartphone device 14  
Active Call View screen 48,  
Index  
SYMBOLS  
Call Log 42  
! in Tasks list 145  
command buttons 27  
Compose dialog box 88  
corporate servers 198  
Dial Pad 39, 47, 60  
Favorites pages 41  
HotSync manager 172  
information 192  
items on expansion cards  
items on pick lists 29  
Palm online support 3  
Pocket Tunes 127  
Quick Tour 2  
secure websites 97, 223  
web browser 33, 97  
web pages 97, 99, 221  
World Clock 142  
Account Setup command 77  
accounts  
See also email accounts  
conference calls and 50  
NUMERICS  
1XRTT  
connections 222  
1xRTT (single carrier) radio  
transmission technology  
1XRTT connections  
troubleshooting 221  
1xRTT technology 69, 222  
24-hour clock 185  
3G2 files 118, 122  
3GP files 118  
active calls. See phone calls  
ActiveSync 174  
Add Bookmark command 99  
Add Call button 47, 49  
Add Contact command 48  
Add Favorites dialog box 53  
Add New Number prompt 48  
Add Song button 128  
Add to album command 120  
adding  
additional security 195  
attachments 79–80  
Bluetooth devices 57–58,  
5-way navigator 7, 25, 26,  
A
AC charger 10  
accented characters 31, 32  
Access Powered devices 3,  
accessing  
Alert screen 157  
bookmarks 99  
business cards 133  
alternate character list 32  
I NDE X  
239  
 
caller ID photos 65, 131  
captions to photos 114,  
categories for applications  
addresses  
adding multiple recipients  
assigning to favorite  
buttons 54  
Alarm Sound pick list 141,  
alarm tones 140  
alarms  
See also alerts  
cities to World Clock 142  
contacts 131  
email addresses 78  
emoticons 89  
highlighting email 27  
sending email and 78  
synchronizing 213  
text messages and 88, 90  
viewing website 104  
web links and 97  
adjusting screen brightness  
adjusting volume  
alarm tones 140  
music 127  
phone calls 14, 64, 216  
ringer 64  
adding to calendar 136,  
adding to tasks 144, 146  
recording sounds for 141  
setting for clock 142  
Album command 120  
Album list 117, 119, 121  
albums. See photo albums;  
video albums  
expansion cards 175  
favorite buttons 52–54  
hands-free devices 59  
memos 151  
multiple recipients 54, 88  
partnerships 58, 106  
passwords 193, 194  
phone numbers 48  
pictures to albums 120  
playlists 128  
alert icon 70  
Alert screen 45, 90, 136, 157  
Alert Sound pick list 85  
alert tones 63, 85, 93  
alerts  
See also alarms  
clearing 158  
displaying 157  
including message text in  
video clips 115  
voice memos 153  
Advanced Mode (calculator)  
Advanced Mode command  
private entries 194  
QuickText phrases 89  
signatures 87  
tasks 143  
TTY/TDD devices 67  
videos to albums 120  
voice memos 152  
wallpaper 121  
agenda lists 133  
Agenda View 60, 134, 139  
Alarm check box 136  
alarm clock 142  
receiving messages and  
responding to 45, 90  
aligning the screen 185  
Alt key 31, 227  
Address Bar pick list 99  
I N D E X  
240  
alternate characters 31, 32  
alternate characters list 32  
anniversaries 137  
Answer button 44  
answering phone calls 44, 46  
antenna 231  
customizing 186187  
deleting 17, 162, 163, 224 Applications View  
disabling synchronization  
for 169  
downloading 102, 161  
finding text in 157  
getting help with 162  
installing 160–162, 201,  
managing 149  
moving around in 23  
opening 7, 33, 34, 47, 177 area conversions 159  
playing music and 127  
recently used 34  
running on expansion  
cards 224  
Applications button 7, 34, 37  
defined 227  
displaying applications in  
opening applications and  
overview 34  
appointments 135, 214  
See also events  
Archive folder 162  
applets 97  
application buttons 33  
application categories 34  
application list view 187  
Application pick list 183  
application preferences 187,  
applications  
See also specific built-in  
applications  
arrow icons 25  
ASF files 118  
Attach Signature check box  
accessing 34  
assigning to Quick Keys  
associating with buttons  
beaming 167  
categorizing 187  
caution for 178, 201  
changing screen fonts for  
closing 33  
copying 178  
sending over Bluetooth  
connections 165  
setting default 188  
switching 47  
synchronization defaults  
for 21  
transferring 16, 17, 165,  
troubleshooting 201  
viewing information about  
attachments  
adding 79–80  
displaying 81  
downloading 81  
multiple files and 80  
pictures as 79, 114  
removing 79  
storing large 224  
supported formats for 149  
video clips as 79, 115  
voice memos as 153  
attendee information 137  
audio 183  
viewing menus for 28  
viewing tips for 2  
copying text to 103  
I NDE X  
241  
See also music; voice  
memos  
Audio Caption command 114  
audio captions  
backgrounds 60, 139  
backing up information 17,  
backlight (keyboard) 30, 184,  
Beam Status dialog box 167,  
beaming  
battery life and 13  
defined 227  
adding 114, 121  
background music and  
playing 117  
backlight icon 184  
Backspace key 30  
Backup folder 163, 202  
backup folders 211, 225  
Basic Mode (calculator) 158  
Basic Mode command 158  
basics 2  
battery  
charging 10–12  
disposing 207  
installing 9  
overview 166–168  
troubleshooting 166, 168  
turning off 198  
birthdays 137  
Audio icon 117  
Auto answer pick list 59  
Auto Lock Device box 193  
Auto naming pick list 116  
Auto Sync dialog box 84  
auto sync failures 85  
Auto-complete check box  
Auto-hide Toolbar option 118  
automated voicemail  
systems 44  
automatic shut-off 197, 227  
automating tasks 52  
Auto-off After pick list 197  
auto-off interval 227  
AVI files 118  
blank screens 207  
blank time slots 139  
Blazer application  
See also web browser  
Blazer web browser 97, 223  
also web browser  
blinking bell 157, 208  
Bluetooth application  
opening 57  
sending from 164, 165  
setting up connections  
visibility options in 165  
Bluetooth devices  
connecting to 57, 106–  
maximizing life of 12, 38,  
replacing 12, 206  
viewing status of 12  
battery door release 8  
battery icons 12, 70  
Beam Business Card  
command 133  
Beam Category command  
Beam command 167  
Beam From pick list 167  
Beam Receive pick list 198  
B
Background check box 139  
background music 119  
disabling or enabling 13,  
I N D E X  
242  
enteringpasskeysfor 107, brightness duration  
C
(backlight) 184, 197  
Brightness slider 197  
incoming calls and 46  
receiving information from browsing files 177  
receiving phone calls and  
sending applications over  
sending information over  
setting up 57–58  
calculator 31, 158  
Calculator icon 158  
calculator modes 158  
calendar  
See also Calendar  
application  
customizing 139140  
deleting events from 138  
displaying 134  
schedulingeventsfor 135,  
selecting alarm tones for  
viewing tasks on 139  
Calendar application  
changing fonts for 184  
changing views for 134  
color-coding events 138  
creating events 135, 136,  
browsing  
built-in applications 2, 160,  
See also applications;  
specific application  
built-in camera. See camera  
built-in security software 189  
Business Card command  
business cards 133, 167  
buttons  
See also favorite buttons  
accessing command 27  
changing defaults for 188  
customizing 187  
disabling 47, 191  
highlighted on screen 26  
opening applications with  
restoring factory defaults  
for 188  
synchronizing from 171,  
troubleshooting 219  
visibility options for 108  
Bluetooth icon 57  
Bluetooth icons (Phone) 70  
BMP files 117  
bonus software. See built-in  
applications  
Bookmark Page icon 101  
bookmark pages 101  
bookmarks 99101, 167  
Bookmarks View 100, 101  
Bookmarks View icon 100  
border glow (highlight) 26  
displaying events 61  
opening 33, 61  
overview 133  
setting alarms from 136  
setting default view 139  
speed-dialing with 41  
brightness (screen) 13, 184, Buttons Preferences screen  
I NDE X  
243  
setting display options in  
Caps Lock mode 31  
captions. See audio captions Change Lock Code option  
certificates 97  
synchronizing information Card Info application 178,  
changing  
Calendar button 7, 33, 134  
Calendar views 134  
call lists. See Call Log screen carrying cases 208, 218  
Call Log button 42  
Call Log screen 42, 48  
call waiting 49  
Card Info button 178  
card readers 126  
bookmarks 100  
button defaults 188  
contact information 132  
default applications 188  
email accounts 84  
events 138  
cascading style sheets 98,  
categories  
Call Waiting dialog box 49  
caller IDs 64, 65, 131  
calls. See phone calls  
camcorder 115, 116  
camcorder buttons 115  
Camcorder icon 114  
Camcorder View 114, 116,  
adding ringtones for 65  
applications and 34, 187  
beaming and 167, 168  
color-coding in 138  
contacts and 132  
events and 138, 140  
memos and 151  
naming 187  
receiving from Bluetooth  
and 166  
favorite buttons 54  
information 15  
lock codes 192  
owner information 195  
passwords 194, 195  
playlists 128  
QuickText phrases 89  
screen fonts 184  
wallpaper 39  
camera buttons (Camera  
View) 114  
web page layouts 98  
character entry 30, 31, 32,  
sending over Bluetooth  
connections 164  
Camera icon 113  
camera lens 8  
character limits  
Camera View 113, 116, 121 Category command 187  
Cancel button 79 category marker 140  
Cancel button (Active Call) 46 Category pick list 139, 140,  
Cancel Spkr button 46 187  
cancelling menu selection 28 CDs 126  
Caps Lock indicator 31 Center button 7  
memos 151  
text messages 88  
character searches 157  
charge indicator 7, 11, 12  
charger cable 11  
I N D E X  
244  
charging  
smartphone 10, 11, 13  
color-coded category marker  
transferring multimedia to  
smartphone battery 10–12 color-coding events 138  
transferring music from  
Con button (calculator) 159  
charging status 12  
chat icon 92, 94  
Chat page (Preferences) 93  
Chat screen 92  
chat sessions 91, 92, 93  
Chat view 91  
Choose Songs button 127  
Choose Songs command  
colored backgrounds 27  
command buttons 27  
commands. See menu items conduits 135, 213  
completed tasks 144, 145,  
completion dates 146  
components (Treo  
smartphone) 1  
Conf button 50  
conference calls 49, 50, 51  
Confirm message deletion  
check box 92  
conflicting applications 201  
conflicting events 139  
connecting  
Compose dialog box 88, 89  
Compress Day View check  
box 139  
city information 141, 142,  
headsets 55–56  
City pick list 142  
Clear Cache button 105  
Clear Cookies button 105  
See also World Clock  
closing  
compressed files 160, 161  
computers  
connecting smartphone to  
downloading applications  
to Bluetooth devices 57,  
to computers 20  
to virtual private networks  
to websites 97, 106  
application menus 28  
applications 33  
installing applications from connections  
receiving information over  
pick lists 29  
installing synchronization  
software on 19  
quarantined files on 16,  
Bluetooth 165  
restrictions for 47  
sending information over  
Bluetooth 164  
color palette 116  
color preferences 93, 116,  
Color Theme Preferences  
screen 186  
synchronizing with 15, 22  
transferring information to  
setting up Bluetooth 171  
troubleshooting 216, 221  
TTY devices and 67  
I NDE X  
245  
viewing status of 69, 220  
constants 159  
Contact Edit dialog box 131  
contact names 40  
contacts  
See also Contacts  
application  
adding photos to 121  
assigning caller IDs to 65  
creating 131  
conversion functions  
(calculator) 158, 159  
Copy button 120, 178  
Copy command 103, 178  
Copy Items dialog box 120  
Copy items to pick list 120  
Copy to command 120  
Copy To pick list 178  
copying  
Create chats from messages  
pick list 93  
creating  
albums 120  
audio captions 114, 121  
bookmarks 99  
business cards 133  
caller ID photos 65, 131  
categories for applications  
deleting 133  
editing 132  
entering phone numbers  
looking up 53  
marking as private 132  
scrolling through 26  
searching for 40, 61, 132  
synchronizing 131, 174  
viewing details about 41  
Contacts application  
adding events to 137  
changing fonts for 184  
opening 131  
applications 178  
multimedia files 122, 123  
music files 125  
phone numbers 39  
photos 119  
text 103  
chat sessions 92, 93  
cities for World Clock 142  
contacts 131  
email 97  
email messages 78  
memos 151  
partnerships 58, 106  
passwords 193, 194  
playlists 128  
private entries 194  
QuickText phrases 89  
signatures 87  
user folders 202  
videos 119  
copyrighted materials 119  
corporate email accounts  
corporate servers 21  
See language settings  
tasks 143  
synchronizing information coupling 216  
text messages 88–89  
voice memos 152  
wallpaper 121  
current date and time 141  
current events 61  
coverage area 13, 63, 68,  
Contacts button 131  
Contacts list 27, 133  
contracts 1  
Coverage in/out pick list 63  
crashes 208  
I N D E X  
246  
Current Privacy pick list 194, data transfer 69  
Default Apps Preferences  
screen 189  
databases 157  
customer service (wireless  
service provider) 3  
customer support (Palm) 3  
customizing  
applications 186–187  
bookmarks 101  
Date & Time Preferences  
screen 196  
date formats 185  
date preferences 196  
Date stamp pick list 116  
dates  
default settings 188  
Default View pick list 139  
degrees 159  
delays 193  
Delete command 83, 121,  
buttons 187  
calendar 139–140  
camera 116  
adding to photos 116  
changing event 138  
completed tasks and 145, Delete Contact command  
delete confirmation  
messages 92  
chat sessions 93  
Keyguard 190  
displaying 134, 141  
selecting 135  
Delete events older than pick  
list 138  
messaging options 92  
smartphone 134, 181  
system date and time 196  
system sounds 183–184  
tasks 146  
setting due 144  
setting system 196  
sorting on 91  
Delete From pick list 163  
Delete Memo command 151  
Delete Old command 83  
Delete Task command 146  
deleting  
albums 120, 121  
alerts 158  
applications 17, 162, 163,  
attachments 79  
bookmarks 101  
contacts 133  
cookies 105  
device names 18  
synchronizing 196  
viewing due 145, 146  
datestamps 116  
Day display options 139  
Day View 134, 139  
daylight saving time 142  
decimal display formats  
(calculator) 159  
web browser 104106  
D
daily events 134  
Daily Repeating Events  
check box 140  
daily schedules 134  
data. See information  
data service icons 220  
data services 75, 97, 220  
decimal values 159, 185  
decompression utilities 161  
Default Alarm pick list 141  
I NDE X  
247  
events 138  
files 224  
memos 151  
messages 91, 92  
music from playlists 128  
passwords 194  
playlists 128  
Dial Pad 31, 39, 60  
Dial Pad button 47  
Dial Preferences screen 66  
dialog boxes  
accessing command  
buttons on 28  
defined 227  
discovery 166  
Discovery icon 107  
discovery results list 107  
Discovery Results screen  
discussion groups 3  
disk space (smartphone) 224  
Display my name in chat  
window as entry field 93  
Display Options command  
tasks 146  
video clips 115, 120, 122  
desktop software. See Palm digital cameras 117  
getting help with 3  
highlighted buttons in 26  
Desktop software;  
software  
Details button 27  
See also camera  
dimming keyboard backlight  
Display Options dialog box  
displaying  
Details command 121  
Device Name field 57  
device names 18, 57, 166,  
Disable cookies check box  
Disable JavaScript check box  
alerts 157  
alternate characters 32  
application information  
devices, entering passkeys  
and 58  
disabling  
Add New Number prompt  
application menus 28  
applications 187  
attachments 81  
devices. See Bluetooth  
devices; hands-free  
devices; smartphone  
Dial another call prompt 49  
Dial button 42  
Dial Extra Digits  
Automatically option 54  
Dial Number dialog box 42  
Bluetooth devices 13, 59  
cookies 104  
bookmarks 100  
connection status 69, 220  
contacts information 41  
current date and time 141  
due dates 145, 146  
email messages 81  
error messages 226  
event categories 140  
Keyguard 37, 190  
onscreen buttons 47, 191  
synchronization 169  
system sounds 183  
the touchscreen 189, 191  
web page images 98, 105  
I N D E X  
248  
items in pick lists 29  
on-device guide 2  
overdue tasks 134  
personal calendar 134  
private entries 194  
Quick Tour 2  
signal strength 69  
slide shows 118  
unread messages 71,  
video clips 116, 118, 122  
video recording time 114  
voicemail messages 69  
web addresses 104  
web pages 97, 99  
DOC files 149  
documentation 1, 2, 25, 75  
Documents application 149–  
Documents icon 150  
Documents To Go icon 150  
Documents To Go software  
email messages 84  
ringtones 61  
support information 3  
Downloads bookmark 102  
downward-pointing arrows  
Edit Favorites Pages  
command 53, 55  
Edit Playlist dialog box 128  
edit screens 28  
editing. See changing  
Effects pick list 116  
email  
adding multiple addresses  
adding signatures 87  
attaching photos to 79,  
attaching ringtones 80  
attaching videos to 79,  
attaching voice memos to  
creating 78, 97  
customizing 8487  
defining favorite buttons  
for 54  
deleting 83, 224  
dialing from 41  
drafts 79, 89  
Drafts button 79  
drained battery icon 12  
draining the battery 10, 11,  
Draw on Photo command  
drawing tools 114  
drivers 173  
Due Date pick list 144  
due dates 144, 146  
E
earpiece 7, 46  
eBooks 17  
echoes 216  
EditBookmarkListdialogbox  
Edit Bookmarks command  
downloading 84  
forwarding 82  
removing attachments for  
downloading  
applications 102, 161  
attachments 81  
Edit Favorites Button  
command 54  
replying to 82  
I NDE X  
249  
requirements for 1  
resending 79  
retrieving 81  
scrolling 81  
scrolling through 26  
selecting default  
application for 188  
setting alerts for 85  
sort options for 83  
storing attachments 224  
synchronizing 174  
troubleshooting 220  
viewing attachments 81  
viewing status of 82  
viewing unread messages  
email accounts  
changing 84  
setting email preferences  
and 84  
setting up 77, 87  
email application 75  
email applications 188, 222  
Email button 7, 33  
email options 78, 83  
empty time slots 139  
emptying Trash folder 83  
Enable background play  
check box 127  
Escalate ring tone volume  
check box 62  
EVDO broadband technology  
EVDO connections  
troubleshooting 221  
viewing status of 69  
encryption 66, 97  
Eng(x) display format 159  
engineering notation 159  
entering  
decimal values 159, 185 event conflicts 139  
device names 18, 57, 209 Event Details dialog box 136,  
email addresses 78  
information 15, 195  
lock codes 191, 192  
numbers 31, 158  
passwords 45, 193, 194  
phone numbers 39–42,  
events  
changing 138  
color-coding 138  
creating 135, 136  
deleting 138  
displaying 61, 134, 139,  
scheduling repeating 137  
setting alarms for 136,  
synchronizing 134, 174  
troubleshooting 214–215  
viewing categories of 140  
viewing duration of 139  
Evolution Data Optimized  
(EVDO) technology 228  
tasks 143  
URLs 104  
web addresses 99  
entries. See information  
entry screens 26, 194  
emergency calls 66, 70, 191 envelope icon 83  
emoticons 89  
empty battery icon 12  
erasing information 208  
error messages 226  
I N D E X  
250  
Excel spreadsheets 73, 80,  
renaming 179  
sending attachments to 82  
features (Treo smartphone)  
Exchange ActiveSync 87  
Exchange Address Book 213  
Exchange Servers 87  
expansion card slot 8, 175  
expansion cards  
accessing items on 177  
adding 175  
beaming from 167  
caution for 17, 179  
copying applications to  
copying music to 125  
copying photos or videos  
deleting applications on  
displaying albums on 117  
downloading to 101  
formatting 178, 179  
inserting 175, 176  
installing applications on  
managing files on 177  
moving files to 17  
opening applications on  
storing information on 17, feedback 216  
fields 26, 29  
transferring applications  
from 178  
file types  
pictures 117  
viewing information about  
videos 118  
files  
extensions (phone) 47, 54  
Extra Digits button (Active  
Call View) 47  
accessing 149, 198  
attaching to email 80  
browsing 177  
Extra Digits option (Add  
Favorites) 54  
deleting 224  
downloading 101, 160  
movingtoexpansioncards  
opening 150  
saving 150  
streaming 102  
transferring 16, 224  
Files application 177  
financial calculator 158  
financial functions 159  
Find dialog box 157  
Find More button 157  
Find Text on Page command  
F
fade setting 139  
Fast Mode (web browser)  
favorite buttons  
adding 52–54  
defined 228  
dialing with 41  
editing 54  
organizing 55  
specifying number of 61  
transferringtosmartphone  
finding  
chat sessions 92  
contacts 40, 61, 132  
Favorites pages 41, 54, 61  
opening files on 150  
I NDE X  
251  
specific characters 157  
web pages 99  
firewalls 198  
5-way navigator 7, 25, 26,  
Fixed display format 159  
Flash mode 51  
flight mode 38  
Float display format 159  
folder pick list 83  
switching between email  
Font command 98  
Font size pick list 184  
freeing disk space  
(smartphone) 224  
freeing memory 105, 162,  
freezes 201, 204  
From pick list 178  
full charge (battery) 10  
troubleshooting 218–220  
Hands-free Preferences  
screen 59  
Hands-free Setup button 57  
Hang Up All button 46  
hanging up phone 43, 46, 49,  
hard resets 192, 204  
hardware 1  
headphones 123  
headset button 44, 56  
headset jack 8  
headsets  
See also hands-free  
devices  
Bluetooth devices and 57,  
connecting to smartphone  
G
Game Volume pick list 183  
getting started 2, 13  
GIF files 117  
Glossary 227  
GPS receivers 109  
gradients 159  
graphics. See images  
grouping photos or videos  
forgetting passwords 192,  
groupware 87  
Format Card command 179  
Formats Preferences screen  
formatting expansion cards  
forums 3  
forwarding  
email 82  
phone calls 51  
entering passkeys for 109  
hearing-impaired services 67  
hexadecimal characters 159  
Hide Records option 194  
hiding  
H
HAC setting 68  
hands-free devices  
adding 59  
connecting to 56  
entering passkeys for 58  
passkeys and 58  
receiving phone calls and  
blank time slots 139  
I N D E X  
252  
information in entry  
screens 194  
HotSync Setup button 171  
HotSync technology 228  
links  
Incompatible Apps directory  
indicator light 7, 11, 12  
Info command 17, 163  
Info screens 163  
information  
accessing 192  
backing up 17, 21, 205  
beaming 167  
changing 15  
erasing all 208  
hard resets and 192  
marking as private 194–  
masking 189, 194  
protecting 189, 192  
receiving over Bluetooth  
connections 165  
sending over Bluetooth  
connections 164  
Pics&Videos toolbar 118  
private entries 194  
web browser toolbar 103  
High Priority command 89  
highlighted buttons 26  
highlighting  
I
Ignore button 44  
Ignore with Text button 44  
image file types 102, 117  
images  
disabling web page 98,  
applications 34  
favorite buttons 41  
items in pick lists 29  
items on screen 26  
menu items 28  
phone numbers 42  
web links 27, 98  
hints 193  
History command 103  
History list 103  
Hold button 46, 49  
holidays 137  
downloading 102  
saving 102  
selecting as wallpaper 60  
transferring 17, 224  
troubleshooting 222  
importing phone numbers  
Inbox icons 82  
home city 141  
Incoming dialog box 86  
incoming messages 94  
incoming phone calls 43, 49,  
incompatible applications 17,  
home page 104  
synchronizing 15, 19, 21,  
transferring 16, 22, 166  
infrared port  
home page icon 99, 104  
HotSync Log 211  
HotSync Manager 173, 228  
HotSync manager 172  
HotSync Manager icon 172,  
beaming from 167, 168  
I NDE X  
253  
defined 228  
location of 8  
Internet  
See also web browsing;  
K
keyboard  
synchronizing with 173,  
infrared transmission 228  
inserting expansion cards  
websites  
accessing alternate  
characters on 31  
dialing with 39  
entering information from  
illustrated 30  
incremental searches  
from 40  
locking 189  
restoring factory defaults  
connections 98, 106  
installing applications from  
troubleshooting 221  
interruptions 226  
Into album pick list 120  
invalid characters 89  
IR port  
beaming from 167, 168  
defined 228  
location of 8  
synchronizing with 173,  
items in pick lists 29  
items on screen  
activating 27  
installer 160  
installing  
applications 160–162,  
bonus software 22, 160  
Palm Desktop software  
smartphone battery 9  
synchronization software  
third-party applications  
keyboard backlight 30, 184,  
Keyguard 189, 190  
Keyguard Preferences  
screen 190  
Known Caller pick list 62  
VPN clients 198  
interference 217, 219  
highlighting 26  
selecting 27  
L
Label color pick list 93  
language selection screen  
language settings 185, 203,  
laptops 172, 173  
large attachments 224  
length functions 159  
alternate characters  
J
Java applets 97  
JavaScript elements 105  
JPG files 117  
World Clock  
language settings  
I N D E X  
254  
liability ii  
locations, disabling/enabling  
transmission of 67  
lock codes 191, 192  
Lock Device dialog box 193  
lock icon 98, 119, 165, 167  
locking  
Mac systems  
installing applications from  
installing synchronization  
software on 19  
installing to expansion  
cards and 162  
lightning bolt icons 12, 70  
Li-ion battery 228  
See also battery  
links 90  
See also web links  
list screens  
See also pick lists  
accessing command  
buttons on 27  
highlighting items in 27  
selecting items on 26  
list view (applications) 187  
listening to  
voice captions 117  
voice memos 152  
Lithium ion battery 228  
loading web pages 90, 105,  
Local button 172  
locating  
chat sessions 92  
contacts 40, 61, 132  
specific characters 157  
web pages 99  
Location icon 67, 70  
Location On option 67  
keyboard 189  
touch-sensitive features  
Treo smartphone 192,  
logging in to corporate  
servers 198  
logic functions 159  
looking up contacts 53  
Lookup button 53  
loops 204  
listening to music and 123  
removing applications and  
requirements for 15  
synchronization defaults  
for 21  
synchronizing with 170,  
transferring music from  
uninstalling desktop  
software and 211  
upgrading and 18  
user folders on 202  
magnet 8  
losing  
information 179, 192, 205  
passwords 192, 195  
Lost Password option 195  
low coverage areas 216  
lowercase letters 30  
mail. See email  
Mail Service pick list 77  
Manage Playlists command  
map (World Clock) 142  
maps (web pages) 222  
M
M4V files 118  
I NDE X  
255  
marking information as  
private 194–195  
marking private contacts 132  
Mask Records option 194  
overview 147  
removing memos with  
synchronizing information  
including in alerts 92  
invalid characters in 89  
receiving 89  
retrieving 45, 69  
saving 89  
mathematical constants 159 Memos button 151  
scrolling through 26  
selecting phone numbers  
setting colors for 93  
setting preferences for  
mathematical functions 159  
maximizing battery life 12,  
Memos list 27  
Menu button 7  
menu items 28  
media features 13  
Media Player 123, 125, 126  
memory  
Menu key 28, 30  
menu shortcuts 28  
menus 28  
freeing 162, 224  
freeing for applications  
purging old events 138  
setting limits 105  
memory slots (calculator)  
memos  
See also notes  
creating 151  
deleting 151  
Message command 43  
message lists 91  
Message Tone pick list 94  
messages  
adding multiple recipients  
for 54  
arranging in folders 91  
chat sessions and 92  
checking status of 69, 71  
creating 88  
defining favorite buttons  
for 54  
specifying priority settings  
for 89  
troubleshooting 220  
Messages page  
(Preferences) 92  
messaging 73  
See also text messages  
Messaging application  
See also text messages  
changing fonts for 184  
creating chat sessions  
from 92  
recording 151  
scrolling through 26  
Memos application  
changing fonts for 184  
entering text in 151  
opening 33, 151  
deleting 91, 92  
dialing from 41  
displaying status of 94  
displaying unread 71, 134,  
creating text messages  
with 88  
customizing 92  
deleting messages in 91  
opening 33  
I N D E X  
256  
overview 88  
Microsoft Word documents  
miniSD  
cards 235  
expansion card slot 8  
mirror 8  
mobile networks 216  
Month display options 140  
Month View 134, 140  
Move to command 120  
moving  
answering phone calls and  
sorting messages in 91  
status indicators for 94  
messaging applications 188  
Messaging button 33  
Messaging Inbox 27  
messaging preferences 92–  
messaging services 1  
messaging, troubleshooting  
changing playlists for 128  
creating playlists for 128  
downloading 102  
listening to 123, 127  
memory consumption and  
pausing 127  
playing 102, 127  
selecting 127  
metric values 159  
bookmarks 101  
favorite buttons 55  
moving around on screen 23, music file types 102  
stopping 127  
uploading 125  
microphone 8, 47, 116  
Microphone pick list 116  
Microsoft Excel 73, 80  
Microsoft Excel  
spreadsheets 149  
Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync 87, 174  
Microsoft Exchange Servers MP4 files 118  
See Documents  
application  
music files 123, 125, 224  
music subscription services  
moving through web pages  
MP3 files 125  
MP3 formats 123  
mute button 47  
N
names  
sorting on 91  
MPEG-4 formats 122  
MPG files 118  
synchronizing and 209  
naming  
categories 187  
messages for chat  
sessions 93  
multi-connector pin 8  
multimedia file types 118  
multimedia files 117  
multiple recipients 54, 88  
music  
Outlook  
Windows systems  
adjusting volume 127  
photo albums 113  
I NDE X  
257  
photo groups 116  
playlists 128  
entering from keyboard  
Optimized Mode (web  
browser) 97, 98  
video albums 115  
voice memos 152, 153  
navigator buttons 7, 25, 26  
See also 5-way navigator  
networks 216, 221  
New Bookmark dialog box 99  
New button 27  
New Message dialog box 79  
Next Song button 127  
No Service message 13, 68  
Normal Mode (web browser)  
Note button 132  
notes  
See also memos  
adding to contact  
information 132  
adding to events 138  
adding to tasks 144  
scrolling through 26  
storing 151  
notifications 45, 85  
See also alerts  
number formats 185  
numbers  
calculator display options  
for 159  
Option button 33  
O
Option key indicator 31  
Option Lock indicator 31  
Option Lock mode 31, 89  
options in pick lists 29  
organizer features 1, 13, 21,  
offline synchronization 213  
offline viewing (web) 100  
OK button 27  
online forums 3  
online support 3  
opening  
Alert screen 157  
application menus 28  
applications 7, 33, 34, 47,  
Bookmarks View 100  
Call Log 42  
Dial Pad 39, 47, 60  
email applications 222  
files 150  
Outbox 94  
Outbox button 79  
outgoing messages 94  
outgoing phone calls 49  
Outlook  
duplicate entries in 213  
entering information with  
Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync and 174  
multipleappointmentsand  
multiple contacts and 131  
synchronizing with 20, 21,  
History list 103  
HotSync manager 172  
Pocket Tunes 127  
Quick Tour 2  
web browser 33, 97  
web pages 90, 105, 222  
World Clock 142  
operating system  
(smartphone) 16  
operating systems (PCs) 15  
time zones and 135  
Outlook folders 213  
overdue tasks 134, 139, 145  
owner information 195  
I N D E X  
258  
Owner Preferences screen  
Palm OS software 16  
Palm OS-compatible  
applications 160  
Palm Software Installation  
paper clip icon 79, 81  
paragraphs, selecting 27  
partial battery icon 12  
partnerships 58, 106, 229  
Password box 193, 195  
password hints 193  
passwords  
caution for 194  
changing 194, 195  
deleting 194  
dialing 47, 54  
email and 77, 78  
entering 45  
forgetting 192, 195  
owner information and  
private entries and 189,  
smartphone and 192  
Paste command 39, 103  
pasting  
phone numbers 39  
text 103  
Pause button 127  
pausing  
music 127  
streamed content 103  
video playback 116, 118  
video recording 116  
voice memos 152  
PCs. See personal  
computers  
P
page icon 94  
partnerships  
Palm Desktop software  
defined 228  
device names in 227  
entering information with  
forgetting passwords and  
installing 16, 161, 203  
Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync and 175  
multipleappointmentsand  
multiple contacts and 131  
reinstalling 213  
synchronizing with 21,  
PDB (Palm OS) databases  
PDF files 80, 149  
pending alerts 90  
pending messages 92, 94  
personal computers  
connecting smartphone to  
downloading applications  
installing applications from  
installing synchronization  
software on 19  
quarantined files on 16,  
synchronizing with 15, 22  
transferring information to  
time zones and 135  
troubleshooting 203, 210  
upgrades and 18  
Palm folder 113, 114  
Palm online support 3  
I NDE X  
259  
transferring multimedia to  
selecting ringtones for 61, phone calls  
See also phone; phone  
transferring music from  
personal information 129,  
See also information  
personal information  
managers 203, 229  
personal schedules 133  
personalizing smartphone  
See also preferences  
phone  
See also phone calls  
answering 44, 46  
conference calls and 50,  
service carrier for 1  
silencing ringer for 44, 183  
troubleshooting 216–218  
turning on and off 37, 38  
viewing Call Log for 42  
Phone application  
accessing Dial Pad in 39,  
adding caller IDs 64, 65  
customizing 60  
dialing from 42  
displaying events in 134  
enabling privacy settings  
from 66  
finding contacts from 40  
opening 33, 39  
numbers  
adding a second 49  
adjusting volume for 14,  
automatically answering  
disabling screen for 190  
forwarding 51  
keyboard backlight and 30  
placing on hold 46, 49  
receiving 43, 49  
restrictions for 47  
running applications and  
dialing preferences for 65  
getting started with 13  
hands-free devices and  
locking 191–192  
maximizing batterylife and  
overview 35  
selecting wallpaper for 60,  
setting alert tones 63  
setting ringtones 61  
setting TTY/TDD  
sending to voicemail 44  
switching between active  
text messages and 90  
transmitting location  
during 67  
viewing status of 49  
phoneindicator. Seeindicator  
light  
Phone Info command 14  
Phone Info screen 14  
connections 67  
status icons for 68–71  
turning HAC on/off 68  
Phone button 7, 33  
privacy settings for 66  
selecting alert tones for 63 Phone Call screen 44  
I N D E X  
260  
Phone Lock 191  
Phone Lock command 191  
phone numbers  
adding 48  
assigning prefix to 65  
copying 39  
dialing extra digits with 47,  
getting device 14  
highlighting 27  
adding caller ID 65, 131  
adding captions to 114  
adding to albums 120  
adding to contacts 121  
backing up 122  
Pics&Videos application  
copying pictures and  
videos in 120  
creating wallpaper with  
hiding toolbar in 118  
opening 117  
organizing media with 120  
removing photos or videos  
from 121  
rotating photos in 121  
sending pictures or videos  
from 119  
synchronizing information  
copying 119  
deleting 114, 122  
displaying information  
about 121  
downloading 102  
grouping 117  
personalizing 114  
positioning on screen 117  
removing from albums  
importing 144  
pasting into Dial Pad 39  
redialing most recent 42  
saving 48  
selecting 42  
Phone Off message 13, 38,  
phone on icon 69  
Phone Preferences  
command 66  
Phone Preferences screen  
rotating 121  
saving 114  
viewing pictures in 117  
viewing slide shows in  
viewing videos in 118  
Pics&Videos icon 117  
picture formats 117  
Picture list 119  
See also images; photos  
PIM applications 1, 229  
PIMs 203  
scrolling through 26  
selecting as backgrounds  
setting default size 116  
setting preferences for  
photo albums 113, 117, 120  
Photo Settings screen 116  
photos  
storing 111  
See also pictures  
adding as wallpaper 121  
pick lists 26, 29  
plain text formats 82  
Play button (Pocket Tunes)  
I NDE X  
261  
Play icon (web browser) 102 PRC (Palm OS) applications  
preinstalled applications 2,  
See also applications;  
specific application  
presentations 149  
playback  
pausing 103, 116, 118,  
precautions 232  
predefined passkeys 58,  
resuming 103, 127  
stopping 127, 152  
preferences  
preset delays 193  
playing  
alarm tones 140  
alert tones 63  
applications 187, 189  
buttons 187  
calculator 159  
camcorder 116  
camera 116  
preset passkeys 58, 107,  
pressing keyboard keys 30  
pressing onscreen buttons  
Previous Song button 127  
primary applications 33  
primary button assignments  
streamed content 102  
video clips 115, 118  
voice captions 117  
voice memos 152  
playlists 128  
Playlists command 128  
plug-ins 97  
country-specific 185  
dialing 65  
Pocket Tunes application  
changing playlists in 128  
creating playlists in 128  
opening 125  
overview 123, 125  
playing music from 127  
upgrading 123  
hands-free devices 59  
Keyguard 190  
messaging 92–94  
owner information 195  
power settings 197  
ringtones 61, 62  
system colors 186  
prioritizing tasks 143, 146  
priority levels 143, 146  
priority settings 89  
privacy flag 144  
Privacy Mode check box 92  
privacy settings 66  
private entries 189, 194195  
programs. See applications  
POP protocols 86  
ports 20  
system date and time 196 progress indicator bar (video  
Power Preferences screen  
Power/End button 7, 37, 38  
PowerPoint files 80, 149  
PPT files 149  
system sounds 183  
tasks 146  
web pages 104–106  
prefixes (phone numbers) 65  
Prefs icon 195  
recording) 116  
Prompt sounds pick list 116  
protecting personal  
information 189, 192  
protecting the screen 7, 208  
I N D E X  
262  
protecting Treo smartphone  
Protocol pick list 77  
proxy servers 106  
receiving phone calls 43, 49  
recently viewed web page  
icon 99  
rechargeable battery 1  
Record command 167  
Record Completion Date  
check box 146  
reinstalling Palm Desktop  
software 213  
reinstalling third-party  
applications 202, 205  
Reminder Sound pick list 141  
reminders 136, 143  
Remove from album  
command 120  
pTunes icon 125  
punctuation marks 31, 32  
Purge command 91, 138  
Purge pick list 91  
recorder 151  
purging old information 17  
recording  
removing  
ringtones 62  
sounds 141  
videos 114  
albums 120, 121  
alerts 158  
applications 17, 162, 163,  
attachments 79  
bookmarks 101  
contacts 133  
cookies 105  
device names 18  
events 138  
expansion cards 176  
files 224  
Q
quarantined files 16, 18, 201  
quick buttons 33, 187  
Quick Install 229  
voice memos 151  
Records button 164  
recovering lost passwords  
repeating events  
red paper clip icon 79  
redialingmostrecentnumber  
redirector (websites) 222  
Refresh command 221  
Refresh icon (web pages) 98  
refreshing web pages 98,  
Quick Keys 54  
Quick Tour documentation 2  
QuickText button 89  
QuickText phrases 89  
R
radians 159  
radio frequency emissions  
random number generator  
range (Bluetooth devices)  
memos 151  
messages 91, 92  
music from playlists 128  
passwords 194  
playlists 128  
Rcl button (calculator) 159  
readjusting the screen 185  
tasks 146  
I NDE X  
263  
video clips 115, 120, 122  
Rename Card command 179  
Rename Memo command  
Review photos/videos pick  
list 116  
RF emissions 231  
ringer  
Save as Contact command  
Save as Wallpaper command  
renaming expansion cards  
repeat intervals (events) 137  
Repeat pick list 137, 141,  
repeating alarms 141  
repeating event icon 137  
repeating events 137, 140  
repeating tasks 144  
replacingsmartphonebattery  
rescheduling events 138  
caution for 192  
resizing text 98  
Resolution pick list 116  
resolution settings (camera)  
restricting location  
information 67  
resuming playback 103, 127  
Return key 30  
adjusting volume 64  
silencing 44  
turning off 183  
Ringer switch 9, 38, 44, 183  
ringtone file types 102  
Ringtone pick list 64  
ringtone preferences 61, 62  
ringtones  
assigning to caller IDs 64,  
downloading 61, 102  
recording 62  
sending with messages  
Save List button 128  
Save Page command 100  
saved web page indicator  
saving  
files 150  
images 102  
messages 89  
phone numbers 48  
photos 114  
playlists 128  
video clips 115  
voice memos 152  
web pages 100  
schedules 134  
scheduling events 135, 136,  
Sci(x) display format 159  
scientific calculator 158  
scientific notation 159  
screen  
setting for phone 62  
setting phone 61, 62  
roaming icon 69  
Roaming message 68  
Roaming pick list 62  
rotating photos 121  
accessing command  
buttons on 27  
activating items on 27  
S
Save As command 150  
I N D E X  
264  
adjusting brightness 184,  
aligning 185  
automatically turning off  
battery life and 13  
disabling 47, 189, 191  
locking 190  
moving around on 23, 25  
protecting 7, 208  
scrolling through 26  
selecting items on 27, 29  
troubleshooting 207–208  
turning on or off 37, 197,  
secondary applications 33  
secure connections 106  
secure web pages 98  
secure websites 97, 223  
security 58, 195  
Security button 193, 194  
security certificates 97  
Security dialog box 193  
security software 189  
Select Font dialog box 184  
Select Media screen 80  
selecting  
wallpaper 60, 121  
web links 98  
self-portrait mirror 8  
Send button 7, 42, 79  
Send command 165  
Send From pick list 165  
Send To Device droplet 125  
sending  
applications over  
Bluetooth 165  
calls to voicemail 44  
email 79, 90, 97  
informationoverBluetooth  
messages 43, 88, 94  
to chat rooms 92  
video clips 115, 119  
voice memos 153  
Sent folder 94  
alarm tones 140  
applications 34, 177  
chat sessions 91, 92  
dates 135  
favorite buttons 41  
home city 141  
items in pick lists 29  
items on screen 27  
menu items 28  
waking up 37  
screen fonts 184  
screen protectors 208  
scroll arrows 81  
scroll bars 26  
scrolling 26, 98  
servers 21, 198  
scrolling preferences 105  
SD cards 235  
SD_Audio folder 126  
search results 157  
searching for  
music 127  
service contracts 1  
service providers 69, 75, 76  
See also wireless service  
provider  
phone numbers 42  
photo albums 117, 119  
playlists 128  
songs 127  
setting  
contacts 40, 61, 132  
specific characters 157  
time zones 135  
video albums 118, 119  
alarm clocks 142  
passwords 45, 193, 194  
setting up smartphone 2, 10  
I NDE X  
265  
settings (incompatible) 201  
Setup Devices button 107,  
Setup Devices dialog box 57,  
Shift/Find indicator 30  
Shift/Find key 30, 157  
Short Messaging Service  
(SMS) 229  
Show Messages check box  
Show Priorities check box  
Show Time Bars check box  
Show timestamps in chats  
check box 93  
slider 26  
Slideshow Setting command  
smartphone  
activating 14  
adding additional security  
for 195  
battery life for 12  
charging 10, 11, 13  
components of 1  
connecting Bluetooth  
devices to 106, 108  
connecting to PCs 20  
customizing 134, 181  
documentation  
conventions for 37  
entering passkeys for 58  
features illustrated 7–9  
freeing memory for 162,  
freeing space for 224  
getting help with 2–3, 199  
getting phone number for  
headsets compatible with  
Show Wallpaper option 60  
Shutter sounds pick list 116  
shortcuts 28, 34  
Show Address Bar check box Side button 7, 127, 152, 187  
Signal faded pick list 63  
signal strength 63, 69, 216,  
signal strength indicator 38  
signal-strength icon 38  
signatures 87  
silencing system sounds 44,  
silencing the ringer 44  
silent alarm 62, 63, 140  
silent alerts 93  
Show Calendar event check  
Show Categories check box  
Show Category Column  
check box 140  
Show Category List check  
Show Completed Items  
check box 146  
Show Due Dates check box  
Show Due Tasks check box  
single carrier (1xRTT) radio  
transmission technology  
SIT files 161  
Show Favorite buttons check Size button 17, 164  
locking 192, 193  
navigating around on 23  
box 61  
slide show options 119  
slide shows 118  
I N D E X  
266  
overview 1  
software  
See also Palm Desktop  
software  
accessing from web  
browser 102  
Sound & Alerts Preferences  
Sound Off 9  
Sound Off position (ringer)  
preset bookmarks on 101  
protecting 189–196  
required items for 2  
setting up 10  
included with smartphone Sound On position (ringer)  
specifications for 235  
storing 7, 8  
synchronization defaults  
for 21  
synchronizing 15, 18  
third-partyapplicationsand  
installing 22, 160  
managing 149  
reinstalling 213  
synchronization defaults  
for 21  
sound preferences 140  
Sounds button 183  
Space key 30  
speaker 8  
synchronizing information speakerphone 46, 47, 216  
transferring data to 17, 21  
troubleshooting 3, 199,  
turning on and off 10  
unauthorized users and  
and 19  
troubleshooting 203  
uninstalling 211  
special characters 31, 32, 89  
specifications 235  
speed-dialing buttons 41  
Spkr-phone button 46  
spreadsheets 73, 80, 149  
Start With pick list 100  
static 217, 219  
updating 201  
software conflicts 211  
songlists. See playlists  
songs. See music  
Sort by check box 146  
updating information on  
viewing signal strength for Sort by Date command 91  
statistical functions 159  
statistical information 163  
status icons (email) 82  
status icons (phone) 68–71  
stereo adapters 56, 123  
stereo headphones 123  
Sto button (calculator) 159  
Sort by Name command 91  
Sort command 91  
sorting  
SMS messaging services  
See also text messages  
soft resets 168, 204  
messages 83  
sorting messages 91  
sorting tasks 146  
I NDE X  
267  
stopping  
music playback 127  
synchronization  
with Bluetooth devices  
with Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync 174  
with Microsoft Outlook  
system colors 186  
ActiveSync and 87  
device names and 18  
overview 155  
preparing for 15  
recommendations for 21  
video recording 115  
voice memo playback 152  
storage solutions 155  
storage space 17  
storing  
information 17, 155, 175,  
removing applications and system dates and time 141,  
music files 126  
notes 151  
selecting applications for  
setting default application  
for 188  
troubleshooting 208–215  
upgrading and 18  
synchronization applications  
(third-party) 205, 209, 212  
synchronization software 15,  
system errors 211, 218, 226  
system requirements (PCs)  
system resets 201, 204,  
smartphone 7, 8  
streaming files 102  
style sheets 98, 105  
submitting web forms 98  
support (Palm) 3  
support (wireless service  
provider) 3  
Syncautomaticallycheckbox  
system sounds 44, 183–184  
System Volume pick list 183  
T
taking pictures 113, 223  
Tap and Drag check box 105  
Task Details dialog box 143  
tasks  
See also events; Tasks  
application  
adding 143  
synchronizing  
Calendar events 134, 174  
contacts 131, 174  
dates and time 196  
email 174  
information 15, 19, 21,  
sync button 20, 22, 125  
sync cable 11, 15, 20  
sync. See synchronization;  
synchronizing  
assigning to attachments  
checking off 144  
photos and videos 122  
time zones 196  
I N D E X  
268  
deleting 146  
displaying 134, 139, 145,  
marking as private 144  
prioritizing 143, 146  
setting alarms for 144,  
setting preferences for  
temperature conversions  
text  
Text Telephone devices 67  
third-party applications  
caution for 188, 201  
compatibility with 16  
deleting 17, 224  
getting help with 162  
installing 201, 224  
reinstalling 202, 205  
searching in 157  
transferring to expansion  
cards 17  
copying 103  
entering 30, 151  
finding 103, 157  
highlighting 27, 103  
resizing 98  
selecting 27, 105  
viewing against photos  
viewing due dates for 145,  
Tasks application  
changing fonts for 184  
opening 143  
synchronizing information  
text fields 26, 29  
text message icon 94  
text messages  
See also messages  
addressing 88  
troubleshooting 25, 204,  
third-party utilities 17, 195  
third-party VPN client  
software 198  
Tasks button 143  
checking status of 70, 71  
containing links 90  
creating 8889  
three-way calling 49, 50, 51  
Thumbnail View 117, 119,  
Tasks Preferences screen  
deleting 91  
dialing from 41  
TIF files 117  
time  
TDD devices 67  
technical support (Palm) 3  
technical support (wireless  
service provider) 3  
telecommunications devices  
retrieving 71, 89  
selecting alert tones for 93  
setting priority of 89  
special characters and 89  
troubleshooting 220  
text messaging service 1  
displaying video recording  
scheduling events and  
setting system 196  
synchronizing 196  
viewing 141  
telephone calls. See phone;  
phone calls  
text messaging services 220 time bars 139  
I NDE X  
269  
time formats 185  
TTY icon 68  
unread messages 71, 94,  
untimed events 136, 137,  
Untimed Events check box  
updating  
application software 201  
information 15, 21, 155  
troubleshooting 201–202  
uploading music files 125  
time preferences 196  
time slots (calendar) 139  
Time Zone pick list 135  
time zones 136, 196, 214  
Timed Events check box 140  
timestamps 93  
TTY/TDD Mode icon 70  
TTY/TDD pick list 67  
turning on or off  
Caps Lock 31  
keyboard backlight 30  
Keyguard 37, 190  
microphone 116  
phone 37, 38  
smartphone 10  
speakerphone 46  
Typing starts contacts search uppercase letters 30  
option 61  
tips 2  
Tips command 2  
to do items. See tasks  
toolbars 103, 118  
touchscreen. See screen  
Touchscreen Preferences  
screen 186  
transmitting location 67  
Trash folder 83  
travel alarm 142  
smartphone  
trigonometric functions 159  
troubleshooting 3, 199  
Trusted Device list 106, 108,  
trusted devices 106  
See also partnerships  
Trusted Devices button 107  
urgent messages 94  
See also web links  
USB hub 20  
U
unauthorized users 189  
Unfiled category 166, 168  
uninstalling  
applications 162  
Palm desktop software  
third-party applications  
Unknown Caller pick list 62  
unlocking  
USB ports 20  
Use color for pick list 93  
user discussion groups 3  
user folders 202, 209, 229  
User Guide 2  
usernames 77  
V
VersaMail application  
accessing email and 75,  
the keyboard 190  
the phone 191, 192  
Treo smartphone 192  
partnerships  
TTY devices 67  
I N D E X  
270  
adding attachments from  
creating email messages  
from 78  
adjusting volume for 115  
attaching to email 79, 115  
backing up 122  
application menus 28  
applications 187  
attachments 81  
copying 119  
bookmarks 100  
customizing 84–87  
displaying attachments  
with 81  
documentation for 75  
Exchange ActiveSync  
accounts and 87  
opening 33  
overview 75  
responding to messages  
from 82  
deleting 115, 122  
displaying information  
about 121  
downloading 102  
grouping 117  
jumping to specific  
sections of 116  
pausing 116, 118  
recording 114  
connection status 69, 220  
contacts information 41  
current date and time 141  
due dates 145, 146  
email messages 81  
error messages 226  
event categories 140  
items in pick lists 29  
on-device guide 2  
setting upaccounts for 76,  
sorting messages with 83  
switching accounts from  
Version button 164  
version numbers 164  
Vibrate pick list 62, 63, 140  
vibrating alarm 62, 63, 140  
removing from albums  
saving 115  
sending 115, 119  
setting default size of 116  
setting preferences for  
overdue tasks 134  
personal calendar 134  
private entries 194  
Quick Tour 2  
signal strength 69  
slide shows 118  
unread messages 71,  
storing 111  
video albums 115, 117, 120 View By pick list 187  
video file types 102, 118  
Video Settings screen 116  
videos  
viewing  
alerts 157  
alternate characters 32  
application information  
video clips 116, 118, 122  
video recording time 114  
voicemail messages 69  
web addresses 104  
web pages 97, 99  
adding to albums 120  
I NDE X  
271  
virtual private networks  
(VPNs) 198  
Visibility pick list 108, 165  
voice captions  
adding 114, 121  
background music and  
music 127  
ringer 64  
dialing phone numbers  
hiding toolbar in 103  
installing applications from  
opening 33, 97  
overview 95, 97  
restrictions for 97  
selecting default views for  
ringtones 62  
video clips 115  
voice memos 153  
Volume button 7, 14, 64  
volume conversions  
(calculator) 159  
playing 117  
Voice Memo application 147, Volume pick list 62, 63  
volume preferences 183  
VPN client software 198  
selecting home page for  
streamed content and 102  
troubleshooting 221  
unsupported elements for  
See Blazer web browser;  
web browser  
web browser icons 98  
web browsing  
See also web browser  
from smartphone 38, 97  
memory consumption and  
requirements for 1  
secure sites and 97, 98  
selecting default  
Voice Memo list 152  
voice memos 152  
voice quality 216  
voicemail  
checking 69  
retrieving messages 45,  
sending calls to 44  
setting alert tones for 63  
setting up 44  
Voicemail Alert pick list 63  
Voicemail button 45  
Voicemail icon 45, 69  
voicemail page icon 94  
Voicemail screen 45  
volume  
W
waking up screen 37  
wallpaper 39, 60, 121  
warranty 2  
web addresses 99, 104  
See also URLs; web links  
web browser  
accessing email providers  
and 75  
auto-completion options  
for 104  
beaming from 167  
bookmarking and 99, 101  
customizing 104106  
deleting cookies for 105  
alarm tones 140  
alert tones 63  
application for 188  
I N D E X  
272  
troubleshooting 220–223  
web browsing service 1  
web forms 98  
Web icon 97  
web links  
assigning to favorite  
buttons 54  
creating email from 97  
highlighting 27  
Palm online support 3  
selecting 98  
web pages  
accessing 97, 99, 221  
bookmarking 99–101  
caching 105, 224  
changing fonts for 98, 184  
changing layouts for 98  
copying text from 103  
dialing from 41  
refreshing 98, 221  
saving 100  
Windows systems  
installing applications from  
installing to expansion  
cards and 162  
listening to music and 123  
removing applications and  
requirements for 15  
sending email and 84  
synchronization defaults  
for 21  
synchronizing with 169,  
transferring music from  
Windows Vista 3, 16, 201,  
accounts; wireless service  
provider  
scrolling 98, 105  
selecting text on 103, 105  
sending email from 97  
setting initial view for 104  
setting preferences for  
viewing offline 100  
web-based email 75  
websites 38  
See also web browsing  
accessing 97, 99, 106,  
displaying addresses for  
displaying recently visited  
downloading files from  
entering addresses for 99  
opening Palm online  
support 3  
redirectors and 222  
transactions and 223  
Week View 134  
disabling images for 98,  
displaying 97, 99  
finding text on 103  
loading 105, 222  
locating most recent 99  
opening from text  
messages 90  
wireless connections 95,  
Bluetooth devices;  
hands-free devices;  
smartphone  
weekly events 134  
weight conversions 159  
Wide Page Mode 98  
opening History list for  
wireless features 13, 225  
I NDE X  
273  
wireless service provider  
customer service for 3  
onscreen message 68  
preset bookmarks and 101  
wizards 160  
X
WMA formats 123  
Word documents 73, 80,  
XLS files 149  
Y
smartphone requirements word searches 157  
Year View 134  
for 1  
words, selecting 27  
World Clock 141–142  
World Clock icon 142  
world map 141  
Z
technical support for 3  
troubleshooting Internet  
connections and 221  
ZIP files 160, 161  
zoom settings (camera) 113  
voicemail services and 44 Wrap Search check box 103  
I N D E X  
274  

Tascam CD 01 U User Manual
Sony Ericsson Sony CMD Z7 User Manual
Sony CD Player CDX GT40U User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA 54001 ST340015ACE User Manual
Philips FR 963 User Manual
Philips CD SOUNDMACHINE AZ1021 User Manual
Pelco Computer Drive DVR5KUP 250 800 User Manual
Panasonic P342i User Manual
Palm TREO 700wx User Manual
Nokia SLIDE 6600i User Manual